JP6947151B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes an advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous transition means.
An additional means for executing an additional process for increasing the number of games executed by the end of the advantageous game state in the advantageous game state.
With
The addition means can execute the addition process in the target game during the addition period in the advantageous gaming state, and does not execute the addition process in the non-target game even during the addition period . ,
This gaming machine is
Based on the execution of the target game in the addition period, the update means for executing the update process for approaching the establishment of the end condition of the addition period, and the update means.
A period-corresponding effect control means for executing the period-corresponding effect during the additional period, and
With
The update means does not execute the update process even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period.
The period-corresponding effect control means advances the period-corresponding effect regardless of whether the target game is executed or the non-target game is executed during the additional period.
When the non-target game is executed in the addition period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, whereas the period-corresponding effect is advanced, so that the addition period ends as compared with the game in which the addition period ends. The feature is that the effect corresponding to the period is completed in the previous game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in an image display device, and the display content of a stop order in a dual-purpose display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bet correspondence processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of starting which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of a combination executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card bet. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of two bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state and the game section existing in a slot machine. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st section and 2nd section, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of each game state in 2nd section. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB combination and 2nd CB combination, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows the state which the game state shifts to a CB state, and how the transition to a CB state is restricted. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notification related to the winning state of the 1st CB combination and the 2nd CB combination (a) to (c). (A) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium. It is a flowchart which shows the internal notification control processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process at the time of supply start executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-internal middle notification process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB internal medium notification processing executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification in the 2nd CB which is executed in the production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the storage area of a main RAM. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear process executed by the main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the partial clear process executed by the main MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how a partial clear process and a full clear process are executed on the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display device when the 1st start command is received, and (b) to explain the display content of the image display device when the 2nd start command is received. It is explanatory drawing of. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the transition to the pseudo-bonus state occurs. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the situation in the case where it is notified that the 1st stop is a left reel in the case of winning with an index value IV = 10, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating an index value IV = 10. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state in the case of being notified that the 1st stop is a right reel in the case of winning. It is a flowchart which shows (a) stop order notification control processing executed by the main MPU, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect control process which is executed in the effect side MPU. (A) to (i) It is a time chart which shows how various effects are executed in the transition waiting period. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing for pseudo-bonus executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition period of the production side executed by the production side MPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the pseudo-bonus state progresses. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution content of the end effect in an image display device, and is explanatory drawing for explaining the execution content of a revival effect in an image display device. (A) to (g) is a time chart showing how the number of games is added during the addition period and how the number of games is notified. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination of the symbols which establishes the 1st CB prize and the combination of the symbols which establishes the 2nd CB prize in the 2nd Embodiment, and (b) the combination of the 1st CB combination or the 2nd CB combination. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the player is elected. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the state that the 2nd section (a)-(g) progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card bet, and (b) explanatory diagram for demonstrating the combination of symbols which establishes the tenth supplementary prize. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of two bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the state that the transition to the 2nd section occurs from (a) to (h). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type of the gaming state and the transition mode of the gaming state in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart which shows the transition mode of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation of the reel when the special bell prize is established in the 6th Embodiment (a)-(c).

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the slot machine 10, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotating shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number or more of game media, which are medals or virtual medals, are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state in which they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the game and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the main line ML described later. Have. Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at a time, and two virtual medals at a time. A second credit insertion button 48 is provided. In the slot machine 10, there are a situation where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and a situation where the number is "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the number of virtual medals stored and stored is less than the difference between the current number of bets and the number of bets that can be bet, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the number of bets is the number of the virtual medals. As the number of medals increases, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of virtual medals stored and stored is one and the current number of bets is "0", the number of bets is "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48, which is pressed when the player operates the button. As a result, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and medals paid out at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated while the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as actual medals.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting values of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". In order to change within the range of "", a setting key insertion hole 57 is provided in which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "20" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main control device 70 described later from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in such a state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), and " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are seven types (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a predetermined number or more of game media bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of granting the game medium is obtained. , The benefit of replaying, or the transition of the gaming state is granted.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Subline SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes in which the game medium is given include the 1st supplementary prize, the 2nd supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 6th supplementary prize, the 7th supplementary prize, and the 8th supplementary prize. There are supplementary prizes, 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, special bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes, 2nd watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol in the main line ML, It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the second supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the third supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the 7th supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the eighth supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the ninth supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the case of any of the 1st supplementary prize to the 9th supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, it is on the main line ML. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, the left reel is on the main line ML. When the stop symbol of 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, or on the main line ML, the left reel 32L If the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first bell is won. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell is won. Will be. Special when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. It will be a bell prize. In the case of any of the first bell winning, the second bell winning, and the special bell winning, the number of game media to be granted is "15".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second watermelon wins. Will be. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is awarded, the number of game media to be granted is "5". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of which of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

There are a normal replay prize, a first chance replay prize, and a second chance replay prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without betting the game medium is given. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, It is usually a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay It will be a prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, a replay privilege that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is granted. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game. In addition, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "2" is bet, the game of the next game is started with the game medium of "2" bet while eliminating the need to bet on the game medium. It becomes possible to do.

There are a first CB prize and a second CB prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. In that case, the first CB prize will be awarded. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second CB It will be a prize. When the first CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second CB state.

The first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped in the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning winnings regardless of whether or not there is a winning combination. For example, even if "1" is not set in the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning, the game medium becomes a player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML. Granted. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on the condition that the corresponding role is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, in the non-CB state, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the reel control similar to that in the normal game is performed, but the reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed in which the left stop button 42 is operated and then only one symbol can be slid. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control for stopping the left reel 32L is performed for the left reel 32L until a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state, the reel control that slides only up to 1 symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button has a maximum of 1 symbol. Control that slides only up to is performed, and reel control that slides only a maximum of one symbol may be performed only for a predetermined reel. Furthermore, the stop buttons operated in a certain order, such as reel control that slides only up to one symbol for the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button. Reel control may be performed so that only one symbol can be slipped on the reel corresponding to the above.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and if the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. In addition, the first bell winning can be established even if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won.

Both the first CB state and the second CB state are gaming states that do not increase the gaming medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state and the second CB state are the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state to reduce. Details of these first CB states and second CB states will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. That is, the image display device 63 executes the display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at positions below the display window units 21L, 21M, and 21R, and is a target of grant when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified content is performed, and further, the management result of the game history is notified. A combined display unit 66 for displaying the reels and a section display unit 67 for displaying the game section corresponding to the second section are provided. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, a section display unit including a combined display unit 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and one light emitting unit. 67 and are aggregated.

Any small role prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize or cherry prize) corresponding to the grant of the game medium If it is established, the number of game media granted corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small winning combination is established. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th supplementary prizes is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side. By displaying it, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been added. If any of the 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize and the special bell prize is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. When "5" is displayed, it is notified that the game medium of "15" has been added. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5". By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "5" has been added. Further, when the cherry winning is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is displayed. Is notified that has been given.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media given by winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described in detail later. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game medium of "1" has been added.

On the other hand, even if a prize such as one of the replay prizes and one of the CB prizes that is not given a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not displayed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case, each The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. The 2 stops are the middle reel 32M and the 3rd stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order is the 1st stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the 1st stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is There is an arbitrary stop order and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is the first when a combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data is won in the combination lottery process in the non-CB state. It can be executed when a winning combination including 2 bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data is won, or when a winning combination including 1st bell winning data and special bell winning data is won. .. Specifically, when a winning combination including the 1st bell winning data and any of the 1st to 6th supplementary winning data is won, the reel 32L is in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, 32R are stopped, the first bell prize is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, the first to sixth supplementary prizes are awarded. Either can be true. If the 1st bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 1st to 6th supplementary prizes is established, "1" is given as already explained. Game medium is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the 2nd bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are placed in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels are stopped, the second bell prize is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, one of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established. obtain. If the 2nd bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established, "1" as already explained. Game medium is given to the player.

When the winning combination including the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the left reel 32L is first stopped in each of the above stop orders. When the first bell winning is established and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the first bell winning or the special bell winning is established. When the first bell prize or the special bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as described above.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed corresponding to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, the reels are displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the notification content of the stop order, the player can pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") becomes 1 or more. It is a section in which the advantageous gaming state to be obtained (specifically, a pseudo-bonus state) can be started and the advantageous gaming state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state is not started and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

When the section display unit 67 wins a winning combination with different winning targets depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a winning combination with different winning positions depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the advantageous game state where the expected value of the game medium is 1 or more by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of a winning prize that is advantageous to the player, the lighting state is set. Become. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state corresponds to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section, which is not the pseudo-bonus state, does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the section shifts from the first section to the second section, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the lit state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when the second section is shifted to, the section display unit 67 changes from the off state to the lit state when the pseudo bonus state is started in the second section.

When the section display unit 67 becomes lit, the lit state is maintained until the second section ends, and when the second section ends and the first section shifts to the first section, the section display unit 67 turns off. Therefore, the second section may be maintained even if the pseudo-bonus state ends and returns to the normal gaming state, but in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state even if the pseudo-bonus state ends. When the second section ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off.

As described above, the section display unit 67 is provided collectively in the common display area 68 in a configuration in which the lighting state is maintained until the end of the second section once the lighting state is set in the second section. The display unit 66 is turned on when the game medium is added and turned off at the start of the next game, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. In some cases, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the section display unit 67 is lit in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second section. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which the state is in a state, and it is possible for the manager of the game hall to easily confirm the section display unit 67.

In the second section, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the section display unit 67 is maintained, in the second section, the section display unit 67 may perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in the board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. The MPU 72 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion is subsequently separated. By putting 83 in the bonded state, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63 at the front door 12. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as described above. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition to that, the MPU 72 has an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the medal insertion Insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51. , The payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, the setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. Various sensors are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the effect control device 90, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permitted state and the reception prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to be given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In that case, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. To be done.

Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 92, directing side ROM 93, and directing side RAM 94.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are performed for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), After the partial clearing process is executed (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), the set value update process is executed after the all clear process is executed (step S105) (step S106). In the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105), a part or all areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. The contents of the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed before that, the credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the set value of "1" is performed on the unit 65. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update process, and the set value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S114).

In the return command, information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data, which will be described later, is stored in the main RAM 74 is set. That is, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. The return command in the state in which is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. The return command in the state in which is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A return command in a state in which the information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is in the OFF state (step S116), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). Then, it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 milliseconds, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated to return to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity on the hopper device 53. As described above, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting medals paid out from the payout device. .. When it becomes necessary to pay out medals, the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out the medals, and the paid out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. Then, when the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, the number of medals to be actually paid out is increased by inserting a fraudulent jig from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58 so that the payout detection sensor cannot detect medals by the fraudulent jig. It is assumed that cheating will cause more medals to be paid out than medals. In this slot machine 10, although the payout device is driven and controlled so as to pay out medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect the medal for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the payout device is driven as an abnormal payout. Although the control will be stopped, if the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the above-mentioned predetermined period. When a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality release operation on the key cylinder 14 after replenishing the medals.

In response to the above fraudulent activity, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving from the medal ejection port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the path from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, when each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the above abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality is detected. Judge. When it is determined that the intrusion abnormality is determined, "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. As a result, the effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of the operating power of the slot machine 10, but when "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74 after the supply of the operating power is restarted. Since the intrusion abnormality command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 again, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. In order to release the state in which "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag, it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

In step S208, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S209, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S210, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211 a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display unit 66 is executed. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S214, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay provided in the main RAM 74 (step S401). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the previous number of bets have already been set by the main MPU 72 when any of the replay prizes has been established in the previous game. It is a flag to do. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 (FIG. 9), provided that one of the replay winnings has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES). (See), the value of the bet number history counter also provided in the main RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. It is a counter of. After that, "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay (step S404).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S401, a negative determination is made in step S402, or the process of step S404 is executed, the bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the bet handling process.

When the current game state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets that is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S502). When the current game state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets that is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the upper limit of bets is set to "2" when the slot machine 10 is in the second CB state, and the upper limit of bets is set to "3" when the slot machine 10 is not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, the stored virtual medals are stored on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO). It is determined whether or not one or more cards have been used and a valid betting operation has been performed (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored and stored. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not the number of stored virtual medals is 1 or more. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. It is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed on condition that the value is 1 or less.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. While setting the maximum number of bets, the value for the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the number of bets setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the maximum number of bets. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

When a positive judgment is made in step S504, a negative judgment is made in step S505, or the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a indicates that a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 1 (step S509). ), If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage storage number (specifically, “50”). (Step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

When a negative determination is made in step S507, a negative determination is made in step S511, or the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). .. When the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), the acceptance provided in the main RAM 74 is provided on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is “3” (step S514: YES). “1” is set in the bet set flag at the time (step S515). On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), the bet set flag at the time of acceptance is set on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES). Is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game is bet. When the game state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where the game medium of "3" is not bet, and 1 when the game medium of "3" is bet. It is possible to start the game once. Further, when the game state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where two or more game media are not bet, and one by betting two or more game media. It is possible to start the game once.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). When the settlement button 51 is operated (step S406: YES), after executing the settlement process (step S407), the bet set flag at the time of receiving the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, when "1" is not set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the number of sheets corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals of No. 1 are ejected to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the hopper device 53 is set so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting process in step S302, "1" is set for either the bet set flag at the time of replay or the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74. Is set or not (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S305). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, the setting process at the start for making various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, the winning combination lottery processing for performing the winning combination in the current game is executed. , Step S308 executes a reel control process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of this combination.

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination to the player is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to the current small winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium giving process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of the game media to be given this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S311). After that, the reception permission process is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the bet set flag at the time of replay and the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), and the main RAM 74 When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), the second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for the directing MPU 92 to recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is the bet number of the game started this time is "3". This is a command for the directing MPU 92 to recognize that it is "2".

When the process of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is set in the bet number history counter of the main RAM 74 (step S605). The value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the lottery process for the winning combination executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. The slot machine 10 is configured to latch a random number at that time from the random number circuit 75 when the start lever 41 is operated. The random number circuit 75 generates random numbers of “0” to “65535”, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and operating the ON operation, a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to set which set value corresponds to the winning probability to execute the winning combination lottery process. If the set value is "n + 1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous for the player. Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the set value is "n + 1" than when the set value is "n", the set value "n + 1" is more advantageous to the player than "n". .. Further, even if the set values are set at the same stage, the case where the number of betting game media is "3" is more advantageous for the player than the case where the number of bets is "2". In addition, there are a first CB state and a second CB state as game states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the current set value, the current number of bets, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described by taking the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table at the time of three bets selected when the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is “2”. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of two bets. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, an index value IV is set in the winning combination lottery table regardless of whether the bet is three or two. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a combination) to be won, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the random number circuit 75. In addition, the number of index values IV is the same at the time of 3-card betting and at the time of 2-card betting, and the types of winning data set for each index value IV are 3-card betting except for index value IV = 17. It is the same at the time and when betting two cards.

Specifically, the index value IV = 1 to 6 is set with the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the second stop command is generated). When the reel) is the middle reel 32M and the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is certain regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the first supplementary prize may be established. When winning with an index value IV = 2, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the fourth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When the index value IV = 3 is won, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize can be established. When winning with an index value IV = 4, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The 1st bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the 6th supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize can be surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the second supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the fifth supplementary prize can be established.

In this slot machine 10, as described above, in the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is applied to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Will be done. In other words, reel control for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the unwinning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). say). The 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not missed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index value IV = 7 to 9 is set with the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The second bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh supplementary prize can be established. When the index value IV = 8 is won, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. The second bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the ninth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The second bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the eighth supplementary prize can be established in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV = 10 is set with the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. On the other hand, when the first stop is either the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the special bell prize can be established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the third stop. However, the special bell prize cannot be established depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop target and the third stop target and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. That is, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the establishment of the special bell winning is prioritized and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed. When the special bell prize cannot be established due to the timing, the first bell prize is surely established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 11. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set at the index value IV = 12. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the cherry winning data is set at the index value IV = 13. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 19, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 14. When winning with an index value IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 15. When winning with an index value IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the normal replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 16. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 19, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

For the index value IV = 17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 in the case of the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting, and in FIG. 18 in the case of the winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting. As shown, only the second CB winning data is set. That is, the first CB winning data is the data set as the winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". It can be established. Further, the second CB winning data is data set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". It can be established. When the first CB winning data is set and the number of bets on the game medium is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first CB prize may not be established. When the second CB winning data is set and the number of bets on the game medium is "2", as shown in FIG. 19, the second CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning is established, and the game after the winning game is displayed. Will not be carried over. On the other hand, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are the clear processing of the main RAM 74 (the first CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or all cleared (step S105), the second CB winning data. (Step S105)), the data is retained until the corresponding prize is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game. In this case, in the game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target.

That is, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning is not established. If the game is played in a situation where the number of bets is "3" after that, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. Further, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning is not established. If the game is played in a situation where the number of bets is "3" after that, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. As a result, even though either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is already stored in the memory, either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is not newly stored. It becomes possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the index value IV = 3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 4, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 are each about 1 /. It is 21.8. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 7, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 are about 1/21.8, respectively. be. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is about 1 / 9.4. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11 is about 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 is about 1/146. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 13 is about 1/423. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is about 1/328. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is about 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is about 1 / 7.3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 3.3.

On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is higher than the case where the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting is selected. It has a low probability. Specifically, when the winning combination lottery table for 2-card betting is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is the probability when the winning combination lottery table for 3-card betting is selected. The probability is less than 2/3 of. As a result, the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet is accompanied by the addition of the game medium than the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a small role winning and a replay winning in which a replay is given.

However, when the winning combination lottery table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 2.2. On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet is executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. In the game to be played, the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 can be made higher than the probability.

In addition to the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting and the winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting, the main ROM 73 is subjected to the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) in each of the first CB state and the second CB state. The lottery table for CB referred to is stored. Only one index value IV is set in the CB lottery table, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning at the index value IV is 3/10, and when the index value IV is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Normal replay prizes are established regardless of the order. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell winning can be established.

Here, the winning probabilities of the index values IV other than the index values IV = 12 and 15 are the same between the set values of "1" to "6". This applies to both the case where the number of bets on the game medium is "3" and the case where the number of bets is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 12 and 15 differ between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning at an index value IV = 12 is the lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability is, and the setting value of "6" is the highest. high. Further, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 15 is the lowest when the set value is "1", the winning probability is higher when the set value is larger, and the highest when the set value is "6". This makes it possible to provide a difference in advantage between the set values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S703), the determination value DV used when determining the winning or not of the winning combination is set. Set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S701 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV = 1, which is the current index value IV, corresponds to the value of this random number. Is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV (step S705). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". When "65535" is exceeded (step S705: YES), the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S706).

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S704, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S705, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the stop information first setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S710, the first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, and the stop order notification control process is executed in step S712. The processing contents of steps S710 to S712 will be described in detail later.

After that, the game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if any of the winning roles is won in the lottery process of this winning combination (FIG. 16), the information corresponding to the winning combination and the information corresponding to the current gaming state. And the information corresponding to the processing results of step S710 and step S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. ..

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production side MPU 92 determines the content of the production in a manner corresponding to the various information grasped. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, and if not. Wait until the weight time elapses. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Notify the players and the like.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (Step S803). If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop command command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S806).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid for one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the vehicle is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S806, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S808), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S809). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S810). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slide number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slide number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slide number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S709 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S811 of the reel control process (FIG. 20) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

If it is determined in step S810 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established.

In the winning processing, if the winning is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be granted is set in the main RAM 74 so that the gaming media can be granted in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (FIG. 13).

After executing the winning determination process, the winning result command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game as the corresponding process at the end of the game. It will be executed after it is done.

First, the CB process for performing the transition control and the progress control of the first CB state or the second CB state is executed (step S901). The processing for CB will be described in detail later. After that, on condition that it is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S904). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the normal processing is executed (step S905), and when the gaming state is the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus processing is executed (step S906). When the game state is the end preparation state, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S906). Further, the second control process (step S906) of the game section is also executed when either the normal process of step S904 or the pseudo-bonus process of step S905 is executed. The processing contents of steps S904 to S906 will be described in detail later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, a positive determination is made in step S902, so that the normal processing in step S904 and the pseudo-bonus processing in step S905 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the process for advancing the normal game state and the process for advancing the pseudo bonus state are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process of the gaming section in step S906 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the process for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and the game section will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section existing in the slot machine 10.

In the slot machine 10, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, and an end preparation state ST5 as game states. These gaming states ST1 to ST5 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which a part of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) or a whole is cleared (step S105) to stay. Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST5 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game regardless of whether the bet is three or two (“the expected number of game media to be granted in one game” to “the game bet in one game”. The value obtained by subtracting the "number of media") is less than 1. Further, in the normal game state ST1, either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the non-internal state, or either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a gaming state that shifts when the first CB winning is established in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", while one game is executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". I can't. Further, the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second CB winning is established. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", while the maximum number of bets is set to "2", so that the game medium of "3" is bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that do not increase the game medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state that reduces the number of. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later. ..

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a gaming state in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied in the normal gaming state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state prepares for ending ST5. If the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 does not end at the time of the transition to the normal game state ST1, the transition to the end preparation state ST5 is performed. It shifts to the normal game state ST1 without. Further, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, or one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is a memorized internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the situation of pseudo-bonus state ST4, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 1 or more when three bets are made, and in the situation of pseudo-bonus state ST4, when two bets are made, the expected value of the game medium in one game The expected net increase is less than 1.

The end preparation state ST5 is a case where the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the second section SC2 ends when the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed thereafter. It is a game state that shifts to. The end preparation state ST5 ends when one game is executed. When the end preparation state ST5 ends, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST5 is a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is 3 or 2 cards. Further, in the end preparation state ST5, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the non-internal state, or either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST5 exist as described above, a game section is set separately from these game states ST1 to ST5. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. That is, in this slot machine 10, as factors that determine the game situation, the number of bets of the game media of "2" and "3", the set values of "1" to "6", and various game states ST1 to ST5 are used. There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order of, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that can be possible is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue. When a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set and the first section SC1 is set. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, it also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and the section in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is set and the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed. It also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 shifts from the first section SC1 when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs based on the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the number of bets is "2" in the first section SC1. Even if a certain game is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, the player who expects the transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" instead of executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". There is.

In the first section SC1, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is definitely less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is less than 1. It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 may end when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the end preparation state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 is completed, the process shifts to the first section SC1. Further, as an end condition of the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1 occurs is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), And by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1, the limited total net increase of the game medium becomes the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (in the situation where the game medium is not granted," 0. ")" To "the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game is not executed)" is subtracted. In the case of a difference number of sheets, it is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as a predetermined reference value.

That is, when the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. Shift to 1 section SC1. Further, when the second section SC2 is continued and the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1. Transition. Then, when any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is terminated and the second section SC2 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. Then, the game shifts to the situation where the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 22, the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 may stay in any of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the end preparation state ST5 do not stay in the first section SC1 but only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each gaming state ST1 to ST5 in the second section SC2. As described above, in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the end preparation state ST5, the game can be executed in any of the situations where the number of bets on the game medium is "3" and "2". Further, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". It is possible to run the game. This is the same even if the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. The expected net increase in game media is less than one. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. , The transition lottery process is executed in the game in which the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Further, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the deduction, the value is decremented by 1. When the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the subtraction of the release game number counter 74e is in the game in which the bet number is "3". Is executed, but not in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute the game having the bet number "3" than to execute the game having the bet number "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, whereas the number of bets is "2". When the game is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium is less than 1. Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, the game in which the bet number is "3" is executed so that the game in which the bet number is "2" is executed. It is more advantageous for the player than.

As described above, even if it is advantageous to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the normal game state ST1 and the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, the second section The number of game media granted in the game in which the number of bets is "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in SC2 is added as the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2. In addition, the game in which the number of bets is "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. NS. That is, although the game in which the number of bets is "2" in either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game is the ending of the second section SC2. It will contribute to the side that satisfies the condition. From this point as well, in the case of either the normal game state ST1 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2, the game in which the bet number is "3" is executed so that the bet number is "2". It is more advantageous for the player than allowing the game to be executed.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB prize can be established and the second CB prize can be established as in the case of the first section SC1. When the first CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 is set in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and the first CB state ST2 are completed. NS. Further, when the second CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and when the second section SC2 is in the second CB state ST3 and after the second CB state ST3 ends, the second section SC2 remains. Be maintained. As described above, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are games owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a gaming state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous gaming states for the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by the continuation of the second section SC2. That is, although the game executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that satisfies the ending condition of the second section SC2. .. Therefore, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it becomes more disadvantageous for the player.

The end preparation state ST5 is the game medium regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the expected net increase value is less than 1, it is a game state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, the game executed in the end preparation state ST5 does not contribute to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and does not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the game is executed in the end preparation state ST5, it contributes to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and further in the second section SC2. It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<About CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described in detail. FIG. 24A shows the first CB combination (that is, the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB combination (that is, the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index value IV), and FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the first CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2". In a game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1 / 3.3. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3". In a game in which the number of bets is "2", there is a probability of winning the second CB combination with a probability of about 1 / 2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the first CB combination, the first CB winning can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "3", while the first CB winning is not established in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV, which may cause so-called omission, is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, the reel The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is set.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3", and in the situation where the number of bets is 2 or less, the game can be executed. It is impossible. In the first CB state ST2, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. And, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stops of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. The first bell winning may be surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell prize is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "3" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game of the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given 30 times in the game executed by betting the game medium of "3". In this case, From the start to the end of the first CB state ST2, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 60. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 becomes a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established, and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game in which the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV, which may cause so-called omission, is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the reel The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the second CB state ST3 is set.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum number of bets on the game medium is "2". In the second CB state ST3, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. And, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stops of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. The configuration may be such that the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell prize is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "2" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given in the game executed by betting the game medium of "2" 30 times. In this case, From the start to the end of the second CB state ST3, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 30. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established, and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as the game states that are disadvantageous to the player as described above, the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". As a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3" after preventing the second CB winning from being established. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed and the second CB combination is won, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed thereafter to obtain the second CB combination. The second CB prize is not established even in the winning state of. Further, in the winning state of the second CB combination, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so that the first CB combination Will not be in the winning state. Then, the first CB prize is not established because the first CB combination is not won, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the transition to the second section SC2 may occur and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur as described above.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the entire main RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are paid out, more medals than originally supposed to be paid out are paid out by preventing the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 from detecting medals by using a fraudulent jig. It is expected that cheating will occur. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, and the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig. In that case, the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted so as not to be detected by the object detection sensor, the act of illegally paying out many medals using the fraudulent jig is repeated. The intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and the intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudster illegally executes the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 to forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification. Then, it is assumed that the game is played by using the illegally obtained medals in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such an illegal act is performed, the entire main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), so that the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. That is, the second CB combination is not in the winning state. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state where the second CB combination is not in the winning state, the player can take the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes the first CB state ST2 which is a game state. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to a person who commits the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, in the game hall, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" before the start of business and setting the winning state of the second CB role, it becomes a normal player who does not perform the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the probability of winning the second CB combination in a game in which the number of bets is "2" is about 1 / 2.2, whereas the number of bets is "3". The probability of winning the first CB combination is about 1 / 3.3. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a game hall or the like to win the second CB combination, the number of games required to reach the winning state of the second CB combination is reduced. Is possible. On the other hand, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed before the second CB combination is mistakenly won, the probability of winning the first CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the second CB combination. If it is low, it becomes difficult to win the first CB role.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB combination is not limited to a higher probability than the probability of winning the 1st CB combination, and the probability of winning the 1st CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB combination. The configuration may be high, and the probability of winning the first CB combination and the probability of winning the second CB combination may be the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a CB process executed by the main MPU 72. The CB process is executed in step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game as described above, the CB processing is also executed in one game, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It will be executed after all the rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set in any of the first CB state flag and the second CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74, the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. (Step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game state is the first CB state ST2 by the main MPU 72, and the second CB state flag is mainly whether or not the game state is the second CB state ST3. It is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the first CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the first CB winning is established (step S1002: YES), "1" is set in the first CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1003), and the first CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as described above, the processes of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14) are executed, so that the game is executed only in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB prize has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the second CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB winning is established (step S1006: YES), "1" is set in the second CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1007), and the second CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the second CB state ST3 has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, as described above, the game medium of "2" is bet by executing the processes of step S503, step S508, step S515 and step S516 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14). The game will be executed only at.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in this game (step S1010). When the first bell winning is established (step S1010: YES), the value of the total grant counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1011). The total grant counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media granted in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. In case, "0" is cleared.

When the value of the total grant counter after 1 addition becomes "30", which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3. The status flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, a state in which the gaming state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and a state in which the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 (a) shows the period during which the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “3” is bet, and FIG. 26 (b) shows the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “2” is bet. The period is shown, FIG. 26 (c) shows the period in which the first CB combination is in the winning state, FIG. 26 (d) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the period. The period during which the first CB prize or the second CB prize can be established is shown, FIG. 26 (f) shows the period which is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 26 (g) shows the first section. The period during which the transition to the second section SC2 is possible is shown in SC1, and FIG. 26 (h) shows the period during which the game is digested in the second section SC2.

First, a case where the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t1 which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 26 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b) in the situation where the second CB combination is in the winning state, the second CB is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed. Even if the 2nd CB combination is won, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the 2nd CB winning will not be established, and in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the 1st CB combination will be won. There is nothing to do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), it is a period during which the CB prize cannot be established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the second section Since a transition to SC2 may occur, the transition to the second section SC2 is possible at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 26 (g).

After that, when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26 (e). Further, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game digested in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h). After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t6, the second CB state ST3 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h).

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started at the timing of t7, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. Therefore, at the timing of the t7, the game to the second section SC2 is performed as shown in FIG. 26 (g). It will be a transitional period. After that, when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

After that, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 26 (c). Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (a) in the situation where the first CB combination is in the winning state, the first CB is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. After that, when the first CB prize is established at the timing of t10, the first CB state ST2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h).

Then, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even after the first CB state ST2 is completed, the second section SC2 is continued as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and the game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 26 (h), the game is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2.

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t12, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 26 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b) in the situation where the second CB combination is in the winning state, the second CB is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (g), the transition to the second section SC2 is possible. It doesn't become. After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the second CB state ST3 is set from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15.

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described.

As described above, although the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous game states for the player, the second CB combination is won by first executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". By executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the second CB combination is not in the winning state and that the third CB combination is in the winning state.

27 (a) to 27 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the notification related to the winning state of the first CB combination and the second CB combination executed by the image display device 63.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation where the game is being executed, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 as shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c). .. In this case, in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 27 (a). .. The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won continues.

As the non-internal notification image G12, the non-internal explicit image G21 showing that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. A non-internal digestion game number image G22 showing the number of games played in the situation is displayed. As the non-internal explicit image G21, the character image "returning" is specifically displayed. As a result, it is clarified that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

As the non-internal digestion game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won is displayed, such as "010 game". .. In this case, the first game in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the partial clear processing (step S104) or the entire clear processing (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. Until the completion, "000 games" are displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22. Further, until the first game in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, the non-internal digestion game number image G22 is used. "000 games" is displayed. After that, regardless of whether the number of bets is "3" or the number of bets is "2", the number of games displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 each time one game is executed is 1 is added.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the second CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB combination is won. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, although the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, the image clearly indicating that the second CB combination is in the winning state is not displayed on the image display device 63.

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the 1st CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3", and the 1st CB combination is won. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal explicit image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB combination is in the winning state is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63. The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal explicit image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the gaming state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is completed.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. Further, also in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. The specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, but for example, in a situation where the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be displayed dimly. .. Further, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of the game medium required by the end of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various bet number-related notifications are executed as notifications related to the winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination. Specifically, as a bet number related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, if the second CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the reel The winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed by the timing when the stop operation of 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. The execution mode of the notification of winning the second CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. The notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination occurs even after the game in which the second CB combination is won, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. In the 2-bet correspondence notification, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game.

In the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The execution mode of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The 3-bet correspondence notification is repeated without sandwiching a game in which the number of bets is "3" and a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game in which the number of bets is "3".

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is effective when the 1st CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3". The winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed by the timing when becomes. The execution mode of the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. However, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination occurs only in the game in which the first CB combination is won, and the number of bets in the subsequent winning state of the first CB combination is "2" and the number of bets is "3". It does not run in any of the games.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. In the 2-bet correspondence notification, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game.

Next, a state in which various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 (a) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “2”, FIG. 28 (b) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 28 (c) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”. Indicates the period during which the notification sound at the time of "2" betting, which occurs when the game in which is "2" is executed, is output, and FIG. 28 (d) shows the period in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The period during which the notification sound at the time of "3" betting that occurs in the case of "3" is output is shown, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63. (F) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28 (g) shows the period during which the first CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 28 (h) shows the period in which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed. The period during which the 2CB combination is won is shown, FIG. 28 (i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 28 (j) shows the period during which the image display device 63 is in the CB state. Indicates the period during which the display is performed.

By starting the supply of the operating power to the slot machine 10, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is being executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 28E, the image display device 63 starts displaying the non-internally notified image G12.

After that, at the timing of t2, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 28 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is supported as shown in FIG. 28 (d). The notification sound is output. As a result, it is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is being executed in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. It becomes. Further, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 28B, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is intentionally repeated in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28B, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 28 (g), the first CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is output. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t4, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB combination is won at the timing of t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB prize. In this case, at the timing of t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (e), and the first display in the image display device 63 is as shown in FIG. 28 (f). The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 28 (g) and 28 (i), the first CB prize is established, and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing of t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (f), and the image display device 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (j). The display during the CB state is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, as shown in FIG. 28 (j), the display during the CB state in the image display device 63 is continued. After that, by repeating the game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB state ST2 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28 (i). In this case, at the timing of t9, the display in the CB state in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (j). Further, since neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28 (e). Will be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 28A, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing of t10, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 28 (h), the second CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB combination is won at the timing of t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB prize. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is present. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28B at each of the timing of t15 and the timing of t16, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the 3-bet correspondence notification and the winning correspondence of the 2nd CB combination are supported for the game. No notification is executed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is present. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium as described above will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an internal notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not the command at the start of supply is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the main MPU 72 starts supplying the operating power, if there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main RAM 74, the power recovery command is used as the command at the start of the supply in the main process (FIG. 10). Send either a full initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, the power recovery command is the address before the power is cut off without executing the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) when no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74. This command is sent when returning to. The all initialization command is a command transmitted when the all clear process (step S105) is executed as described later. The partial initialization command is a command transmitted when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed as described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the control process at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a control process at the start of supply.

When the all clear process (step S105) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image in the image display device 63. The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear process (step S105) is executed, since the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized as described in detail later, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. It becomes a situation. Therefore, when all the initialization commands are received, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When a partial clear process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and a partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command is executed. Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is in the winning state (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized and the area other than the area (the area other than the area) (details will be described later). The area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the main side even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. However, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained. As will be described later, the partial initialization command is set with information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, in step S1204, it is specified whether or not the information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is partially included in the initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The second CB internal middle flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify that the second CB combination is in the winning state.

When the power recovery command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1208). As described above, the power recovery command is set with information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB combination is in the winning state (step S1208: YES), "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is in the winning state based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1210). When the first CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1210: NO), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When the first CB combination is in the winning state (step S1210: YES), the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB internal middle flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB combination is in the winning state.

Returning to the explanation of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29), when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command is used in this game. It is determined whether or not the first CB prize has been established while winning the 1CB combination (step S1104). The main MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the directing MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game are stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 20). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, and whether or not the winning is established in the current game. Information and, if a prize has been established in this game, information on the type of prize for which the prize has been established are set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , The display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB combination is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command, and the second CB combination is won. It is determined whether or not the 2CB winning is established (step S1108). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1110). ..

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not the first CB winning command or the second CB winning command is received from the main MPU 72. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established in this game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 25) when the first CB winning is established, and the CB processing when the second CB winning is established. The second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of FIG. 25 (FIG. 25).

If any of the CB winnings is established (step S1111: YES), the CB internal middle flag clearing process is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal medium flag clearing process, when "1" is set in the first CB internal medium flag of the effect side RAM 94, the first CB internal medium flag is cleared to "0", and the inside of the second CB of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. When "1" is set in the middle flag, the middle flag inside the second CB is cleared by "0". After that, the end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, when the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the display in the CB state in the image display device 63 is started (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not the CB end command is received from the main MPU 72 to determine the execution target. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been changed have been completed (step S1115). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 25) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed are completed.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed are completed (step S1115: YES), the CB state display in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1116). After that, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), "1" is set for both the first CB internal flag and the second CB internal flag of the production side RAM 94. If is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), the non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the first CB internal flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , The first CB internal notification process is executed (step S1122). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S1120: YES). , The second CB internal notification process is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a non-internal medium notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is added by 1 (step S1301). The returning counter is a counter for the effector MPU 92 to specify the number of times the game has been executed since the display of the non-internal notification image G12 was started on the image display device 63, and is set in the returning counter. The number corresponding to the value is displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. When the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after 1 addition is displayed in the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1303). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), "1" is set in the "3" bet notification flag (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, a 3-bet correspondence notification is provided to notify that a game in which the number of bets is "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. To be executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "Three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "3" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "3" bet notification flag, the "3" bet notification process is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated in the situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1304, or when the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB combination has been won in this game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determine (step S1307). When the first CB combination is won (step S1307: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the first CB is executed (step S1308). In the notification process at the time of winning the first CB, the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, when the number of bets in this game is "2" and the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the production side RAM 94 Is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

After that, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won in this game from the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). When the second CB combination is won (step S1310: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1311). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first CB internal internal notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1401). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), "1" is set in the "2" bet notified flag (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second CB internal internal notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1501). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag (step S1504). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or when the process of step S1504 is executed, the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1505). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. By executing the notification processing at the time of winning the second CB as described above, in the winning state of the second CB combination, every time the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is notified. It will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the area of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in each of the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 34, an address is set in each storage area of the main RAM 74. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address of "00FF" is set as the start address, the address of "01FF" is set as the address of the next order, and the address of "02FF" is set as the address of the next order. The address is set so that it will be a serial number even after that.

As a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF", a second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set. When the index value IV in which the second CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the second CB winning data is set in the second CB winning data area, and the second CB winning is established. Clears the 2nd CB winning data from the 2nd CB winning data area.

The first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as the storage area corresponding to the next order "01FF" with respect to the starting address "00FF". When the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and the first CB winning is established. Clears the 1st CB winning data from the 1st CB winning data area.

As a storage area corresponding to "02FF", which is the next order with respect to "01FF", a set value storage area, which is an area for storing the set value to be set, is set. The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the all clearing process executed in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1602).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1603). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "00FF", which is the start address, the target address becomes "01FF", and if the target address up to that point is "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF". ".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processes of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all the storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1602 in this all clear process. After that, an all initialization command indicating that the all clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing a partial clearing process executed in step S104 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is an address in the following order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address “00FF” of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of clearing “0” and is excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). Is also excluded. After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1702).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1703). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "01FF", which is the address in the next order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF" and the target address up to that point is "02FF". If it is, the target address becomes "03FF".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 in this way, all of the storage areas other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main RAM 74, among the storage areas of the main RAM 74 "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1702 in the partial clear process this time. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the corresponding information set. Will be sent.

Next, a state in which the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) are executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 36 (a) shows the period during which the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, and FIG. 36 (b) shows the period during which the main process (FIG. 10) is executed by the main MPU 72. c) indicates the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. 36 (d) shows the execution of the RAM clear operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is being pressed. The timing is shown, FIG. 36 (e) shows the period during which the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed by the main MPU 72, and FIG. 36 (f) shows the entire clearing process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. 36 (g) shows the period in which the first CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 36 (h) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. Will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 36C, the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (a) at the timing of t1, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at the MPU 72, and then a part of the clear process (FIG. 35 (b)) is performed at the main MPU 72 from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 36 (e). Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB is also started after the timing of t3. The state in which the winning data is stored is maintained. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

When the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed so that the operating power to the main MPU 72 in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted when the supply of the set value is stopped, after the execution of the set value update process (step S106). It is also possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB role. As a result, the manager of the game hall does not repeatedly execute the game in which the number of bets is "2" before the opening of the game hall to make the second CB winning state a winning state every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a bad event.

Next, with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes all clear processing (FIG. 35 (a)). The case will be described.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 36D, the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is being pressed. When the RAM clear operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 36 (a), and the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at, and the entire clear process (FIG. 35 (a)) is executed by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36 (f) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 thereafter. Will be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB winning is performed at the timing of t6. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clear operation is performed as described above, the all clear process (FIG. 35 (a)) is executed so that the second CB winning data is erased, so that the all clear process is illegally performed (FIG. 35). When (a)) is executed, it is possible to set the situation in which the first CB combination and the second CB combination have not been won. Then, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as it is without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player may shift to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. It will be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clearing process (FIG. 35A).

Next, with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. This case will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 36C, the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (a) at the timing of t7, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at the MPU 72, and then a part of the clear process (FIG. 35 (b)) is performed at the main MPU 72 from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 36 (e). Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the first CB winning is performed at the timing of t9. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

In the original game, the first CB winning data is deleted even if a part of the clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above. It is possible to eliminate the state in which the first CB winning data, which is an abnormal state, is stored when the set value is changed.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the lottery process for the number of released games in step S1810 are not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processes after step S1803 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810. The lottery process for the number of games to be released will not be executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processes after step S1804 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the release game in step S1810. The number lottery process will not be executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is out of order (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if the winning combination is missed in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806. And the lottery process of the number of released games in step S1810 is not executed.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination (step S1804: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total acquisition number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the above (step S1805). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

The continuous game number counter 74c is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter of. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d sets the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

After that, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, the direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to win the direct hit in the pseudo bonus state ST4 by lottery. do. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 2% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be directly hit and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If there is a 1% chance of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST4 directly, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 10% chance of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST4 directly, and the index value IV = If 14 is won, there is a 5% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 2% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly. .. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the direct hit is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the direct hit lottery process (step S1807: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1808). The first transition confirmation flag is used by the main MPU 72 to identify that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has been won in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when shifting to the second section SC2. It is a flag. When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game ends.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1807: NO), the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S1810). The number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later. It is a counter for identifying. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step). S1811). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

After that, the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. It is determined by lottery whether the section display unit 67 is lit (that is, immediately lit), or whether the section display unit 67 is lit (that is, waiting for lighting) at the time of the subsequent transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 50% probability and lighting standby is performed with a 50% probability. Is selected, and when the index value IV = 11 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%, and when the index value IV = 12 is won. Has a 62% probability of selecting immediate lighting and a 38% probability of selecting lighting standby, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, an 80% probability of immediate lighting is selected and a 20% probability of 20%. When lighting standby is selected and the index value IV = 14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75%, lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25%, and the index value IV = 15 is won. In the case, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%, and if the index value IV = 16 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 40% and 60%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when the index value IV = 17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), "1" is set in the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1813: NO). Step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The second control process of the game section is executed in step S906 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control processing of the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Is executed after all are stopped.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the current state of the flag of the main RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST5 (step S1902). The end preparation state ST5 is a case where the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the second section SC2 ends when the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed thereafter. It is a game state that shifts to.

When the end preparation state is ST5 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1903). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S905) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0 games, and the second section when shifting to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. When it is specified that the SC2 is in the end state, the flag for setting the end preparation state ST5 is set and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: NO), after setting "1" in the end preparation completion flag (step S1904), the processes after step S1905 are executed. When "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5. In this case, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 includes a counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. By clearing various data indicating that, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of released games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and then The remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new transition to the second section SC2. Although the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 Continues as it is without being terminated.

After that, when the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1915). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is completed. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1916). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 executed.

When the end preparation state is not ST5 (step S1902: NO), or when the process of step S1904 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after 1 addition is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), whether the replay prize of the first chance replay prize, the second chance replay prize, or the normal replay prize is established in this game. Whether or not it is determined (step S1907). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1907, and this game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of the gaming state of the state ST3 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the determination in step S1907 is applied.

If none of the replay winnings is established (step S1907: NO), the number of bets in this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). .. In this case, even if the replay winning is established in the previous game and the current game corresponds to the replay due to the establishment of the replay winning, the number of bets in this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a) Value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d determines the total net increase in the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value.

After that, one of the small winning combination prizes (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, special bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon) in which the game medium is given in this game It is determined whether or not the winning and the cherry winning) have been established (step S1909). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1909, and this game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of the gaming state of the state ST3 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the determination in step S1909 is applied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media given in this game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or when the process of step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, since the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d in step S1908, for example, any small winning combination is established in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after shifting to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, from "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game medium is not granted)" to "the second section". When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in the situation where the game is not executed) ”is set as the predetermined difference number. With the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value, the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d. It becomes possible.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S1907, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1911, or when the process of step S1912 is executed, whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". It is determined whether or not (step S1913). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1.

Here, if any of the replay prizes is established, the process of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1907. In a game in which a replay prize is established, the game medium owned by the player is used when setting a bet at the start of the game, but the profit from the establishment of the replay prize is the same as the number of bets in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is possible to replay a new game based on the number of bets. That is, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay prize is established. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S1908 to S1912 in the game in which the replay winning is established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It is possible to omit the execution of the process for changing the value, and it is possible to omit the unnecessary execution of the process.

On the other hand, even in the game in which the replay winning is established, in step S1913, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400", but the second cause is noise or the like. Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. This makes it possible to execute the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, the ending correspondence process is executed (step S1917). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ending correspondence process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2001). The ending flag is measured by using the continuous game number counter 74c to measure the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or by using the total acquired number counter 74d. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the limited total net increase number of game media is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number.

When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2001: NO), the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the first reference game number. It is determined whether or not it is (step S2002). The pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the main MPU 72. The number of first reference games is set to 1400 games, which is less than the maximum number of games in the second section SC2. Further, whether or not the result of adding the value of the result of integrating the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or more than the first reference acquisition number. (Step S2003). The expected value of the game medium acquired in one game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about five. The number of acquired first criteria is set to 2100, which is less than the maximum net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002 or step S2003, the ending flag is set to "1" (step S2004). When "1" is set in the ending flag, the details will be described later, but in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games is not added, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 is set. In the case of transition, the second section SC2 is surely completed and the transition to the first section SC1 is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to satisfy the ending condition of the second section SC2, and in a situation where it is already confirmed that the ending condition is satisfied in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to prevent further addition of the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

After that, on condition that the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2005: YES), the ending command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2006). Upon receiving the ending command, the effect side MPU 92 sets the execution mode of the effect on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The situation where "1" is set in the ending flag basically occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4, but it can also occur in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3. In this case, although the ending flag is set to "1", the game content is not changed and the execution mode of the effect is not changed.

<About normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a process that is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2101). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main MPU 72, and "1" may be set in the second section flag. The second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S2101: NO), the processes after step S2102 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the process for shifting the gaming state from step S2106 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2101: YES) and the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2102: YES), the pseudo bonus process at the start of the game is executed. (Step S2103). The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game will be described later. Even if "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74, if the game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, an affirmative determination is made in step S2102. Make a negative decision.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2101: YES) and the gaming state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2102: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second CB state is ST3 (step S2104). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: YES), the processes after step S2105 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for shifting the gaming state from step S2106 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed. ..

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2105). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2105: NO), the processes after step S2106 are not executed. As a result, even in the second section SC2, in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the process for shifting the gaming state in step S2106 or later to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2105: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference game number (step S2106), and the total is acquired. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter 74d is equal to or greater than the second reference acquisition number (step S2107). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the first section SC1 is set to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, as already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d is a limited total net increase of the game medium from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying the number of sheets by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the first section SC1 is set to the normal game state ST1.

The number of second reference games is set as a number of games less than 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games in the second section SC2, and more than 1400 games, which is the number of first reference games. Is 1450 games. The number of second standard acquisitions is set to be less than the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets in the second section SC2 and larger than the number of first standard acquisitions of 2100, specifically 2150. It is a sheet.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the second reference game number (step S2106: YES), or when the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or greater than the second reference acquisition number (step S2107: YES), the main “1” is set in the third transition confirmation flag provided in the side RAM 74 (step S2108). The third transition confirmation flag means that the maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of second reference games, or the total number of limited net additions of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of acquisitions of the second reference. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the above.

When "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game ends. That is, in the normal game state ST1, when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is almost satisfied in the pre-end period, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to give the benefit of generating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the arrival in the normal game state ST1 during the previous period of the end. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is started when "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag, 50 games are set as the number of continuous games at the start. The number of continuous games set at the start is the number of games that is the difference between 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games in the second section SC2, and 1450 games, which is the number of second reference games. Further, since the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about 5 as described above, the product of the number of continuous games set at the start and the expected acquisition value is the second section. The difference between the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets of SC2 and the second standard acquisition number of 2150 sheets is the same or substantially the same. Further, since the number of the second standard games is set as the number of games larger than the number of the first standard games and the number of the second standard acquisitions is set as the number of games larger than the number of the first standard acquisitions, the third transition is confirmed. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4 triggered by the setting of "1" in the flag, "1" is already set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 at the start of the pseudo bonus state ST4. When "1" is set in the ending flag, as already explained, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games is not added, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state is completed. When shifting to ST1, the second section SC2 is surely completed and the transition to the first section SC1 is performed. Therefore, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 started when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" is basically the second section SC2 when the number of continuous games set at the start is exhausted. The ending condition is satisfied, and at the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After executing the process of step S2108, various clear processes are executed (step S2109). In various clearing processes, the values of the second transition confirmation flag and the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". The second transition confirmation flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later, and the transition standby counter is set to "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been exhausted. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2112), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also the value corresponding to the number of transition standby games is set in the transition standby counter, and the second transition is performed. The value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the situation where "1" is set in the confirmation flag. Then, in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0", so that the gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the number of transition waiting games is exhausted, so that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In this case, when "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag as described above, the second transition confirmation flag is set even if "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag at that time. "0" is cleared. As a result, the pseudo bonus state ST4 triggered by the setting of "1" in the third transition confirmation flag is generated, and the pseudo bonus state triggered by the setting of "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is possible to give priority to the occurrence of ST4.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than the second reference game number and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than the second reference acquisition number (step S2106 and step S2107: NO), the second of the main RAM 74. Whether or not the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination, provided that "1" is not set in the transition confirmation flag (step S2110: NO). (Step S2111). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, the transition lottery process is executed (step S2112). In the shift lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by using the shift lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be won and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If so, there is a 10% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 40% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the index value IV = If you win 14, there is a 30% chance that you will win the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if you win the index value IV = 15, you will have a 20% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. .. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition winning of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2113: YES), "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2114), and the main side A value corresponding to the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) is set in the transition standby counter provided in the RAM 74 (step S2115). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), and the transition standby counter has "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been consumed since it was set. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2112), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also the value corresponding to the number of transition standby games is set in the transition standby counter, and the second transition is performed. The value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the situation where "1" is set in the confirmation flag. Then, in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0", so that the gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the number of transition waiting games is exhausted, so that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal processing is executed in step S904 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2201: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2202). If the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred at the start of this game and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of determining the transition has won the direct hit, the first transition confirmation flag Is set to "1".

When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2202: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the number of initial continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. Set the value corresponding to 40 games. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter sets the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the main MPU 72. It is a counter for specifying at.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2204). The first start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is newly started in a situation where "1" is not set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74. In addition, the first start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is 40 games. In the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, as described above, the remaining number of continuous games is not added in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started in a situation where "1" is not set in the ending flag, the remaining number of continuous games may be added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, displays the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Is displayed. FIG. 42A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the first start command is received.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in a situation where the ending flag is not set to "1". The G31, the game number image G32 showing the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the acquired number image G33 showing the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. In the first effect image G31, in a state where a predetermined character image is displayed in front of the predetermined background image, a moving image display in which the display mode of the predetermined background image and the predetermined character image changes is performed. Number of games In the image G32, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial number of continuous games is displayed, and then one game is digested and the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted by 1. Number of games The number displayed in the image G32 is subtracted by 1. Further, when the remaining number of continuous games is added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number corresponding to the number of games to be added is added to the number displayed in the game number image G32. In the acquired number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards are acquired" is displayed, and then the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, so that the game medium owned by the player. When is increased, the number of game media corresponding to the increase is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), when "1" is not set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2202: NO), "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (step S2205). As already explained, the third transition confirmation flag is that the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of the second reference games, or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is the second reference acquisition. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the number or more.

When "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: YES), the second start setting process is executed (step S2206). In the second start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74, and a value corresponding to 50 games is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. set. As described above, when the first start setting process (step S2203, step S2213) is executed, 40 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, whereas the second start setting process (step S2203, step S2213) is executed. When step S2206) is executed, 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. As a result, the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 executed when "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag is set to the initial number of pseudo-bonus states ST4 executed when another start trigger occurs. It is possible to make the number of games larger than the number of continuous games. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process are different. The configuration may be the same, and the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the first start setting process is larger than the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 set by the second start setting process. It may be configured as the number of games.

After that, the second start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2207). The second start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is newly started in the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74. In addition, the second start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is 50 games. In the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, as described above, the remaining number of continuous games is not added in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started in the situation where the ending flag is set to "1", the remaining number of continuous games is not added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and also displays the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. However, unlike the case where the first start command is received, the display indicating the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not performed. In the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the number of additional games before the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Alternatively, when the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number, the pseudo bonus state ST4 may end with the end of the second section SC2. In this case, by preventing the display indicating the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from being displayed as described above, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second start command is received. As shown in FIG. 42B, the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the ending flag is set to “1”. The G41 and the acquired number image G33 showing the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. In the second effect image G41, in a state where the specific character image is displayed in front of the specific background image, the moving image display in which the display mode of the specific background image and the specific character image changes is performed. In the acquired number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards are acquired" is displayed, and then the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, so that the game medium owned by the player. When is increased, the number of game media corresponding to the increase is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), when "1" is not set in the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Whether or not it is determined (step S2208). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: YES), the processes after step S2209 are not executed. In the process after step S2209, the process of subtracting the number of games required to shift the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of one game is executed, and the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied with the digestion of the game. In that case, the process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by not executing the processing after step S2209, even if the game is digested in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, it is pseudo. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the transition to the bonus state ST4 closer.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2209). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2209: NO), the processes after step S2210 are not executed. As described above, in the processes after step S2210, the process of subtracting the number of games required to shift the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of one game is executed, and the process shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of the game. When the condition is satisfied, the process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number "2" is executed, the process after step S2210 is not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number "2" is digested, it is pseudo. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the transition to the bonus state ST4 closer.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2209: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2210). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) as described above.

When "1" is set in the second shift confirmation flag (step S2210: YES), the value of the shift standby counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2211). As already explained, the transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been exhausted since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". Is. When the value of the transition standby counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2212: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The processing content of the first start setting processing is the same as that of step S2203 of the normal processing (FIG. 41). As a result, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74, and a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. NS.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2214). When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2214: NO), the first start command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S2215), and when "1" is set in the ending flag. (Step S2214: YES) transmits a second start command to the directing MPU 92 (step S2216). The first start command transmitted in step S2215 and the second start command transmitted in step S2216 include information indicating that the number of current initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 40 games. There is.

When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as the upper lamp 61 and the speaker, as in the case of receiving the first start command transmitted in step S2204. It is executed by 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number of games image G32, and the number of acquired images G33. On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as in the case of receiving the second start command transmitted in step S2207. , The speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquired number image G33 so that the display shown in FIG. 42B is performed.

When "1" is not set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2210: NO), the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2217). The release game number counter 74e is the remaining number of games required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in a situation where "1" is not set in any of the first to third shift confirmation flags of the main RAM 74. This is a counter for specifying the number of released games by the main MPU 72. When the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) does not result in a direct hit, the number of released games is set for the number of released games counter 74e, and the number of released games is set. Even when the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the number of released games is set for the released game number counter 74e.

When the value of the release game number counter 74e after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2218: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2213). The processing content of the first start setting processing is the same as that of step S2203 of the normal processing (FIG. 41). As a result, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74, and a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. NS.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2214). When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2214: NO), the first start command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S2215), and when "1" is set in the ending flag. (Step S2214: YES) transmits a second start command to the directing MPU 92 (step S2216). When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as the upper lamp 61 and the speaker, as in the case of receiving the first start command transmitted in step S2204. It is executed by 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the game number image G32, and the acquired number image G33 so that the display shown in FIG. 42A is performed. On the other hand, when the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as in the case of receiving the second start command transmitted in step S2207. , The speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquired number image G33 so that the display shown in FIG. 42B is performed.

When the process of step S2207 is executed, the process of step S2215 is executed, or the process of step S2216 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 ( Step S2219). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state. When "1" is set in the lighting standby flag (step S2219: YES), the lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2220). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. When the process of step S2220 is executed, the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0".

When the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the situation where "1" is set in the lighting standby flag as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more. It is in a state. That is, although the section display unit 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when it shifts to the game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more. .. As a result, in a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is the game state.

Next, a state in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 (a) shows the period during which the game section is the second section SC2, FIG. 43 (b) shows the period during which one game is executed, and FIG. 43 (c) shows the second transition confirmation flag "1". Is set and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, and the status is that "1" is not set in any of the first to third transition confirmation flags, and the number of released games counter. The situation where the transition waiting period is one of the periods in which the value of 74e is 5 or less is shown, FIG. 43 (d) shows the period in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 43 (e) shows the ending of the main RAM 74. FIG. 43 (f) shows a period in which "1" is set in the flag, and FIG. 43 (f) shows a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games can be added in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Is either the period during which the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of the second reference games or the period during which the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of the second reference acquisitions. The situation is shown in the pre-end period.

In a situation where the game section is the first section SC1, a new game is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 43 (b). In this case, by winning any of the winning combinations in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the game section changes from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 43 (a). In addition, the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of the transition to the second section SC2 this time is the direct hit winning. Therefore, at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43 (d). Further, since this time is the pseudo bonus state ST4 started with the start of the second section SC2, “1” is not set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 43 (e). As shown in 43 (f), the additional period is possible. That is, if the additional condition described later is satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4 this time, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be added.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43B, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 including the timing of t3. Then, when the game is executed from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43 (d). However, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 is continued as shown in FIG. 43 (a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43B, the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2 including the timing of t6 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in the game started at the timing of t7, the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), or the remaining number of unlocked games measured by the unlocked game counter 74e reaches 5 games. , As shown in FIG. 43 (c), the transition waiting period is set.

The game is repeatedly played in the transition waiting period, and the fifth game is executed in the transition waiting period in the game executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. As a result, at the timing of t9, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 43 (c), and the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 43 (d). Further, since "1" is not set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 43 (e), the additionable period is set as shown in FIG. 43 (f).

After that, the game is repeatedly performed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the game is executed from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, so that the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 The sum with the value of is equal to or greater than the number of first reference games, or the value of the result of integrating the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. The result is equal to or greater than the number of acquisitions of the first standard. Therefore, at the timing of t11, “1” is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 43 (e). By setting "1" to the ending flag, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will not be added. That is, at the timing of t11, the addable period ends as shown in FIG. 43 (f).

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the ending flag is set to "1", and the game is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, so that the rest of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The number of continuous games of is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t13, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43 (d). Further, since the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends in the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43 (a). do. In this case, the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

Next, a case where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs due to the period before the end will be described.

The game is repeated when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is generated in the second section SC2 and the second section SC2 is maintained at the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the game is played from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. When executed, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the number of first reference games. Therefore, at the timing of t15, “1” is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 43 (e).

After that, in a situation where the game is repeatedly executed and the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 becomes equal to or more than the number of the second reference games, a new game is started at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 43 (b). In this case, the pre-end period is set at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 43 (g), and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started at the timing of t17 when the game ends as shown in FIG. 43 (d). Since "1" has already been set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 43 (e) at the timing when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, the addable period is as shown in FIG. 43 (f). It does not become.

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the game is executed from the timing of t18 to the timing of t19 as shown in FIG. 43 (b), so that the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 Is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t19, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 43 (d). Further, since the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends in the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIG. 43 (a). do. In this case, the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

In the period before the end, before the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0", the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the game medium of the second section SC2 is restricted. When the total net increase number with is reached the upper limit net increase number, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 may be forcibly terminated accordingly. In this case, as described above, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started in the period before the end, the second start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, so that the remaining continuation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the image display device 63. The number of games is not displayed. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly terminated by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, an effect showing that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs during the transition waiting period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

As already explained, the transition waiting period is either the period in which "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, or the first to third transition confirmation flags. Is also one of the periods during which "1" is not set and the value of the release game number counter 74e is 5 or less. When 5 games are exhausted in the transition waiting period, the game shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this transition waiting period, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 utilizes the stop result after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated. An effect that makes the player recognizable that the transition to the reeling will occur can be performed.

44 (a) and 44 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the effect of making the player recognizable that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs.

As already explained, the index value IV = 10, which can be won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game state other than the CB state (first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3), is the first bell winning data and special. Bell winning data is set. When winning with an index value IV = 10, when the left reel 32L is first stopped, regardless of the subsequent stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. The first bell prize is established. On the other hand, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV = 10 is won, the first bell is won or the first bell is won regardless of the subsequent stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A special bell prize is established. In this case, the establishment of the special bell prize is prioritized, and the first bell prize is surely established when the special bell prize cannot be established in relation to the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the configuration in which the first bell winning data and the special bell winning data are set for the index value IV = 10, the normal game state ST1 and not the transition waiting period and the pseudo bonus state ST4. When the index value IV = 10 is won in the situation, a display indicating that the left reel 32L is first stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (a1), the image display device 63 displays the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the combined display unit 66 displays the display corresponding to the stop order. As shown in (a2), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is performed. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is surely established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44 (a3).

On the other hand, when the index value IV = 10 is won in the normal game state ST1 and the transition waiting period, a display indicating that the right reel 32R is first stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (b). Reel. Specifically, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 44 (b1), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is performed, and "white 7" is displayed on the left reel 32L. The symbol, the middle reel 32M is indicated by the "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R is indicated by the "red 7" symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (b2), the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. Then, the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order according to the notification, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on the main line ML. When the buttons 42 to 44 are stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44 (b3).

Even if the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop, the stop buttons 42 to 44 stop the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. When the stop operation is performed, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44 (b3). Even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, each stop is performed at the stop operation timing at which the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are stopped on the inline ML. If the buttons 42 to 44 are not stopped, the first bell winning is established.

With the above configuration, if the index value IV = 10 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the five games in the normal game state ST1 and the transition waiting period, the special bell prize is established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the above is notified, and the combination of symbols that enables the establishment of the special bell prize is notified. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed at the stop operation timing according to the notification, so that a special bell prize is won on the main line ML. To establish. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

The number of game media to be awarded is "15" regardless of whether the first bell prize is established or the special bell prize is established. Therefore, even if the execution mode of the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R differs depending on whether or not the transition waiting period is set when the index value IV = 10 is won, the advantage of the player is affected. It is possible to prevent it. Further, since the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not directly linked to the profit of the player, is the section display unit 67 lit when the above notification of the stop order is performed? Whether or not it is optional.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the above notification will be described. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification control process is performed in step S712, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and after the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. Will be executed.

When the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2301: YES), the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state is executed (step S2302). In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets in this game is "3". On condition that there is, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the establishment of the first bell winning is established. A command for causing the image display device 63 to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be enabled is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. If the number of bets in this game is "2", the image display device may win any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the 63 and the combined display unit 66 is not executed, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed as in the case where the number of bets is "3". It may be configured.

In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets in this game is "3". On condition that there is, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell winning is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the establishment of the second bell winning is established. A command for causing the image display device 63 to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be enabled is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. If the number of bets in this game is "2", the image display device may win any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the 63 and the combined display unit 66 is not executed, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed as in the case where the number of bets is "3". It may be configured.

In the notification control process for the pseudo-bonus state, if the index value IV = 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the first bell winning is established regardless of the number of bets in this game. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the above is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning. Is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 with a command for notifying the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 10 has been won in this game (step S2303). In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the index value IV = 10 is not won, so that the case where a negative judgment is made in step S2301 and the case where a positive judgment is made in step S2303 is normal. The game state is ST1.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2304). The notified flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the special bell winning has already been established during the transition waiting period. When "1" is not set in the notified flag (step S2304: NO), whether or not the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, or the value of the release game counter 74e of the main RAM 74. By determining whether or not is 5 or less (step S2305 and step S2306), it is determined whether or not the transition waiting period is in effect.

In the case of the transition waiting period (step S2305 or step S2306: YES), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S2307). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. After that, the right first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2308). When the production side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

When "1" is set in the notified flag (step S2304: YES), or when it is not the transition waiting period (step S2305 and step S2306: NO), the display data setting process for the left first stop is executed. (Step S2309). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. After that, the left first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2310). When the production side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing a winning determination process executed by the main MPU 72. The winning determination process is executed in step S812, which is a process executed after the rotations of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 20).

If the special bell winning is established in this game (step S2401: YES), whether or not the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, or whether the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is set. By determining whether or not the value is 5 or less (step S2402 and step S2403), it is determined whether or not the transition waiting period is in effect. In the case of the transition waiting period (step S2402 or step S2403: YES), after setting the notified flag of the main RAM 74 to "1" (step S2404), the notified command is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S2405). .. The notified command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the special bell winning has been established during the transition waiting period. When the effecting MPU 92 receives the notified command, the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S2401, a negative determination is made in step S2403, or the process of step S2405 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2406). In other processing, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is won in the winning combination process (FIG. 16). It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established. In the winning processing, if the winning is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be granted is set in the main RAM 74 so that the gaming media can be granted in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. Normally, the effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

When the left first stop command is received (step S2501: YES), the setting process of the left first stop effect is executed (step S2502). In the setting process of the left first stop effect, the process for causing the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is executed.

When the right first stop command is received (step S2503: YES), the right first stop effect setting process is executed (step S2504). In the right first stop effect setting process, a process for causing the image display device 63 to start a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is executed.

When the notified command is received (step S2505: YES), the setting process of the final effect at the time of winning is executed (step S2506). In the setting process of the final effect at the time of winning, the process for indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Run. After that, "1" is set in the final effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2507). The final effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has been confirmed has been executed.

When the first start command or the second start command is received (step S2508: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the final effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2509). The first start command and the second start command are transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started as described above. That is, in step S2509, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started after the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed.

When "1" is not set in the final effect flag (step S2509: NO), the final effect setting process at the time of non-winning is executed (step S2510). In the setting process of the final effect at the time of non-winning, a process is executed so that the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Here, when the setting process of the final effect at the time of winning is executed, the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed, whereas the final effect at the time of non-winning is executed. When the setting process is executed, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started is executed. The contents of these productions are different. The method of differentiating the contents of the effect is arbitrary, and examples thereof include a method of differentizing the contents of the moving image display displayed on the image display device 63 and a method of differentizing the contents of the character image displayed on the image display device 63. Be done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, or if the process of step S2510 is executed, and if the first start command is received (step S2511: YES), the first setting process of the bonus start effect is executed. (Step S2512). On the other hand, if the second start command is received (step S2511: NO), the second setting process of the bonus start effect is executed (step S2513).

In the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect, each of the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display provided in the effect side RAM 94 is included in the first start command received this time. Set the information on the number of initial continuous games (specifically, information on 40 games). The continuous game number counter for grasping is a counter for specifying the remaining continuous game number of the pseudo bonus state ST4 measured by the main MPU 72 by the directing side MPU 92, and the continuous game number counter for display is an image. Number of games on the display device 63 This is a counter for the effector MPU 92 to specify the number of continuous games to be displayed on the image G32. Further, in the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect, the first pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the first pseudo-bonus data table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where "1" is not set in the ending flag is upper. It is executed by the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number of games image G32, and the number of acquired images G33. In the first pseudo-bonus data table, data is set that enables the execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set. If it continues, the data in the first order in the first pseudo-bonus data table will be referenced again. Further, in the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect, the effect side ending flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". The production side ending flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74.

In the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect, the initial number of continuous games counter for grasping the effect side RAM 94 and the continuous game number counter for display are included in the second start command received this time. Information on the number of continuous games (specifically, 40 games or 50 games) is set. Further, in the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect, the second pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the second pseudo-bonus data table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag is upper. It is executed by the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquired number image G33 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). In the second pseudo-bonus data table, data is set that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set. If it continues, the data in the first order in the second pseudo-bonus data table will be referenced again. Further, in the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect, "1" is set in the effect side ending flag of the effect side RAM 94. As already described, the production side ending flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

In addition, after the setting process (step S2510) of the final effect at the time of non-winning was executed, the first setting process (step S2512) of the bonus start effect or the second setting process (step S2513) of the bonus start effect was executed. In this case, first, the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and then the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

In the normal effect control process, other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned various processes (step S2514). In other processes, a process for executing an effect different from each of the above effects is executed in the normal game state ST1.

Next, a state in which various effects are executed during the transition waiting period will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) shows a situation in which the transition waiting period is set, FIG. 47 (b) shows a period in which one game is executed, and FIG. 47 (c) shows a period in which the pseudo bonus state ST4 is displayed. FIG. 47 (d) shows the timing of winning at the index value IV = 10, and FIG. 47 (e) shows the period during which the left first stop notification indicating that the left reel 32L is first stopped is executed. 47 (f) shows the period during which the right first stop notification indicating that the right reel 32R is first stopped is executed, and FIG. 47 (g) shows the timing when the special bell winning is established. (H) shows the period during which the finalized effect at the time of non-winning is executed, and FIG. 47 (i) shows the period during which the finalized effect at the time of winning is executed.

First, a case where a special bell prize is established during the transition waiting period will be described.

A new game is started as shown in FIG. 47 (b) at the timing of t1 which is not the transition waiting period, and the index value IV = 10 is won in the game as shown in FIG. 47 (d). In this case, since it is not the transition waiting period, the left first stop notification indicating that the left reel 32L is first stopped is executed as shown in FIG. 47 (e). The player who has confirmed the left first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the left reel 32L. Therefore, the first bell prize will be established.

Then, at the timing of t2, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 47 (b). In the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the game, the transition is won or the number of remaining released games is 5 or less, so that the transition waiting period is set as shown in FIG. 47 (a).

After that, a new game is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 47 (b), and the index value IV = 10 is won in the game as shown in FIG. 47 (d). In this case, since it is the transition standby period, the right first stop notification indicating that the right reel 32R is first stopped is executed as shown in FIG. 47 (f). The player who confirms the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the right reel 32R, and at the stop operation timing that enables the establishment of the special bell prize. The stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed. However, because the stop operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 is not accurate, the special bell is won even though the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the right reel 32R first stops. Instead, the first bell prize is established.

After that, a new game is started at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 47 (b), and the index value IV = 10 is won in the game as shown in FIG. 47 (d). In this case, since it is the transition standby period, the right first stop notification indicating that the right reel 32R is first stopped is executed as shown in FIG. 47 (f). The player who confirms the right first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the right reel 32R, and at the stop operation timing that enables the establishment of the special bell prize. The stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed. This time, since the stop operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are accurate, the special bell prize is established at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 47 (g). Further, when the special bell prize is established, as shown in FIG. 47 (i), the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is started at the timing of t5.

After that, a new game is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 47 (b), and the index value IV = 10 is won in the game as shown in FIG. 47 (d). In this case, although it is the transition waiting period, since the special bell prize has already been established in the transition waiting period, the left first stop notification indicating that the left reel 32L is first stopped as shown in FIG. 47 (e) is shown. Is executed. The player who has confirmed the left first stop notification performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the left reel 32L. Therefore, the first bell prize will be established.

After that, a new game is started from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 47 (b). In this case, the game is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at the timing of t8 when the game ends, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 47 (a), and the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47 (c). In this case, at the timing of t8 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, as shown in FIG. 47 (i), the final effect at the time of winning is ended and the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

By giving the opportunity to establish the special bell prize in the transition waiting period as described above, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed by using the stop result after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. It becomes possible to notify. In addition, after the special bell winning is established, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed by executing the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed even in the middle of the transition waiting period. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it will occur.

Next, a case where the special bell prize is not established during the transition waiting period will be described.

In the situation of the transition waiting period as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a new game is executed at each of the timing of t9, the timing of t10, and the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 47 (b). In this case, the game started at the timing of t11 is the final game of the transition waiting period. Therefore, at the timing of t12 when the game ends, the transition waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 47 (a), and the pseudo bonus state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 47 (c). In this case, since the special bell winning is not established during the transition waiting period, the final effect at the time of winning is not executed as shown in FIG. 47 (i). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), the final effect at the time of non-winning is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13. That is, an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed. After that, the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed.

As described above, if the special bell winning is not established during the transition waiting period, the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started is executed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started even if the index value IV = 10 is not won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the transition waiting period.

<About pseudo bonus state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. As described above, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in step S710, which is a process. Then, the pseudo-bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S2103 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game. In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is not executed.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S2601). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2601: NO), the processes after step S2602 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in step S2602 or later is not executed. ..

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2602). As already explained, the ending flag has a high possibility that the number of games executed in the second section SC2 measured by using the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the upper limit number of games, or the total acquisition number counter 74d is set. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the limited total net increase number of game media measured by using the game medium is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number. Specifically, when the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 and the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or more than the first reference number of games (specifically, 1400 games). Or, the result of adding the value of the result of integrating the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 as the first reference. When the number of acquired cards (specifically, 2100 cards) or more is reached, "1" is set in the ending flag. If "1" is set in the ending flag (step S2602: YES), the processes after step S2603 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2 is likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the total net increase number with restrictions on the game medium is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number. The process for adding the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in step S2603 or later is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2602: NO), the current state is a pseudo bonus state by determining whether or not the value of the additional period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not it is the additional period in ST4 (step S2603). The additional period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is an additional period and the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period.

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S2603: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (Step S2604: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S2605). In the additional period transition lottery process, the additional period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to reduce the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo bonus state ST4. It is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the addition period in which the addition is likely to occur. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% probability that the additional period will be transferred and the index value IV = 12 will be won. In that case, there is a 5% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and the index value IV = 14 is won. In that case, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 10% probability of winning the transition of the additional period. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition of the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition of the additional period is won (step S2606: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S2607). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period will continue is added to the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. Specifically, the addition period will continue for 10 games, but in step S2607, 20 games, which is the number of games of 10 games or more, is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from becoming "0" in the middle of the addition period. After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2608). The first addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that an addition of the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the production indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. do. After that, "1" is set in the additional winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2609). The additional winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition winning of the additional period has been achieved in the transition lottery process (step S2605) of the additional period.

When the transition winning of the addition period is not achieved in the transition lottery process of the addition period (step S2605) (step S2606: NO), the first addition lottery process is executed (step S2610). In the first additional lottery process, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is increased by using the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the addition to be done. If the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 70% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 5% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 5% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 5% chance that 50 games will be selected, and an 85% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 40% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 15% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 15% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 15% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 55% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 10% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 70% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of being additionally won. Further, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When any one of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games is selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) and the additional game is won (step S2611: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step). S2612). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. After that, the second addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2613). The second addition command is for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the additional game was won in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) and the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610). It is a command, and the second addition command includes information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second addition command, the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games has occurred is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and the addition period is set (step S2603: YES), the second addition lottery process is executed (step S2614). In the second additional lottery process, the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to add to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The number of games to be played is determined by lottery. That is, in the first additional lottery process (step S2610), the number of games may not be added, but in the second additional lottery process (step S2614), the number of games is surely added. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the additional period. In addition, the second additional lottery process (step S2614) is executed in each game that is the target of the remaining number of continuous games in the additional period in the additional period. As a result, in the additional period, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added to each game that is the target of the remaining number of continuous games in the additional period.

In the second additional lottery process (step S2614), when an index value IV other than the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won, 10 games are selected with an 80% probability, and 20 games are selected with a 10% probability. And there is a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 50% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 25% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 25% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 60% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 20% chance that 50 games will be selected. When the index value IV = 13 is won, 10 games are selected with a 20% probability, 20 games are selected with a 40% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 40% probability. When the index value IV = 14 is won, 10 games are selected with a 30% probability, 20 games are selected with a 35% probability, and 50 games are selected with a 35% probability. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 50% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 25% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 25% chance that 50 games will be selected. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Further, the expected value of the number of games to be added when the second additional lottery process (step S2614) is executed once is the game to be added when the first additional lottery process (step S2610) is executed once. The number of games is larger than the expected value. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the additional period.

After that, the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S2615). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2614) is added to the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. After that, the third addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2616). The third addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614), and the third addition command includes the second addition lottery process (step S2614). ) Contains information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the third addition command, the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games has occurred is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Next, the pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus process is executed in step S905 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Is executed after.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S2701). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2701: NO), the processes after step S2702 are not executed. As a result, even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and the additional period in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is further increased. The number of continuous games remaining in is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the CB state is CB. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the game shifts to the CB state in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. ..

When the number of bets on the number of games this time is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2702). After that, by determining whether or not the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period (step S2703).

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S2703: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2704). At the start of this game, if the transition winning of the addition period is achieved in the transfer lottery process (step S2605) of the addition period, "1" is set in the addition winning flag.

When "1" is set in the addition winning flag (step S2704: YES), the addition period setting process is executed (step S2705). In the addition period setting process, a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games of the addition period, is set in the addition period counter of the main RAM 74. Then, after clearing the additional winning flag "0" (step S2706), the start command of the additional period is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2707). The start command of the addition period is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition period has been started. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the command to start the addition period, the effect indicating that the addition period has started and the effect indicating that the addition period has started are executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

When the value of the addition period counter is 1 or more and it is the addition period (step S2703: YES), the value of the addition period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2708). Then, when the value of the addition period counter after the subtraction becomes "0", the addition period ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S2704, when the process of step S2707 is executed, or when the process of step S2708 is executed, whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" is determined. Judgment (step S2709). When the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2709: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2710).

When "1" is not set in the ending flag (step S2710: NO), the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2711). After that, the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S2712). As already explained, the number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112). It is a counter for specifying by MPU 72. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2713). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

After that, the end command of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2714). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended. When the production side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the upper lamp 61, so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed. It controls the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

When "1" is set in the ending flag (step S2710: YES), the setting process of the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S2715). In the setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST5, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2716). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as already explained, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step). S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in this game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends ends.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for a pseudo bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

First, the addition process is executed (step S2801). FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the addition process. In the addition process, it is determined in step S2901 whether or not the first addition command has been received. As already explained, the first addition command is when the number of games at the time of transition (specifically, 20 games) is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the transition to the addition period occurs. This is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72.

When the first addition command is received (step S2901: YES), the information on the number of games to be added (specifically, 20 games) included in the first addition command is read and read out. The information on the number of games is added to each of the continuous game number counter for grasping the effect side RAM 94 and the continuous game number counter for display (step S2902). As already described, the continuous game number counter for grasping is a counter for specifying the remaining continuous game number of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 measured by the main MPU 72 by the directing MPU 92. As already described, the display continuous game number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining continuous game number to be displayed on the game number image G32 in the image display device 63 by the effect side MPU 92. By adding to the value of the continuous game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games of the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63. When the number of games is added, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display is updated so that the number of games in the number of games image G32 increases.

In the addition process, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the second addition command has been received. As already described, the second addition command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the addition is won in the first addition lottery process (step S2610).

When the second addition command is received (step S2903: YES), the stock lottery process is executed (step S2904). In the stock lottery process, the stock lottery table provided in the production side ROM 93 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used to determine whether or not to notify the player of the addition generated this time by lottery. decide. In this case, there is a 50% probability that the stock lottery will be missed, and the player will be notified of the addition that has occurred this time, and a 50% probability that the stock will be won, so that the player will not be notified of the addition that has occurred this time.

If the stock lottery is not performed in the stock lottery process (step S2905: NO), information on the number of games to be added included in the second addition command received this time (specifically, 10 games, 20). (Any game or 50 games) is read, and the information on the number of read games is added to each of the continuous game number counter for grasping the effect side RAM 94 and the continuous game number counter for display (step S2906). By adding to the value of the continuous game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games of the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63. When the number of games is added, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display is updated so that the number of games in the number of games image G32 increases.

If the stock is won in the stock lottery process (step S2905: YES), the information on the number of games to be added included in the second addition command received this time (specifically, 10 games and 20 games). And 50 games), and the information on the number of read games is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping the effect side RAM 94, but is not added to the continuous game number counter for display (step S2907). Since it is not added to the value of the continuous game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is not added to the number of games of the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63.

In the addition process, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not the third addition command has been received. The third addition command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed by starting the game to be consumed by the remaining number of continuous games in the addition period during the addition period. Command.

When the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the effect side addition period (step S2909). The additional period is a period that lasts for 10 games as already explained. However, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the addition period, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is not executed, so that the number of games is not added and the remaining continuous games in the addition period are not generated. The number is not digested. Further, when a CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs during the addition period, the number of games is not added even if the game is executed in the CB state, and the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period is not generated. Is not digested.

On the other hand, during the addition period, the effect corresponding to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 under the control of the effect side MPU 92. In particular, in the image display device 63, a moving image is displayed along a series of stories corresponding to the additional period, and in this moving image display, a moving image portion corresponding to the game is started every time a new game is executed in the additional period. It is done so that. Then, the moving image display is set so that when the tenth game ends after the addition period starts, the moving image display along the series of stories ends.

In the above configuration, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped in the main MPU 72, while the addition is stopped in the production side MPU 92. Proceed with the production corresponding to the period. That is, after the production corresponding to the addition period is started, even if the progress of the addition period is stopped by the main MPU 72, the production corresponding to the addition period proceeds with the new start of one game. It will be. Therefore, even if a game that causes the main MPU 72 to stop the progress of the addition period occurs in the middle of the addition period, it is possible to proceed with the effect corresponding to the addition period without discomfort.

If a game that causes the main MPU 72 to stop the progress of the addition period occurs in the middle of the addition period, in the game after the video display along the series of stories corresponding to the addition period is completed. , The actual addition period controlled by the main MPU 72 will end. In this case, the effect side addition period is a period during which the effect corresponding to the effect side addition period is executed under the control of the effect side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the start command of the addition period from the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 sets the information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games of the addition period, in the production side addition period counter provided in the production side RAM 94. .. Then, every time a new game is started, the value of the additional period counter on the production side is subtracted by 1 regardless of whether the game is in the non-CB state and the number of bets is "3". The effect corresponding to the value of the side addition period counter is executed in each game, and the effect corresponding to the addition period is executed when the game in which the value of the effect side addition period counter is "0" ends. To end.

When the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES) and the value of the effect side addition period counter is 1 or more and the effect side addition period is received (step S2909: YES), the third received this time. The information on the number of games to be added (specifically, any of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games) included in the 3 addition command is read, and the information on the read number of games is used in the production side RAM 94. It is added to each of the continuous game number counter for grasping and the continuous game number counter for display (step S2910). By adding to the value of the continuous game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is added to the number of games of the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63. When the number of games is added, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display is updated so that the number of games in the number of games image G32 increases.

After that, the progress processing of the additional effect is executed (step S2911). In the progress processing of the additional effect, the value of the additional period counter on the effect side is subtracted by 1. In addition, the data range to be referred to in the data table for executing the additional effect read in the effect side RAM 94 is updated in accordance with the start of the new game this time. For example, in the case of the first game of the production side addition period, the data range of the first game in the above data table is the reference target, and in the case of the second game of the production side addition period, the data range of the second game in the above data table. Is the reference target, and if it is the 10th game of the production side addition period, the data range of the 10th game in the above data table is the reference target.

When the third addition command is received (step S2908: YES) and the value of the effect side addition period counter is "0", it is not the effect side addition period (step S2909: NO), and this time it is received. Information on the number of games to be added (specifically, any of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games) included in the third addition command is read, and the information on the read number of games is used as the production side RAM 94. While adding to the continuous game number counter for grasping, it is not added to the continuous game number counter for display (step S2912). Since it is not added to the value of the continuous game number counter for display, the number of games to be added this time is not added to the number of games of the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the description of the effect control process for the pseudo bonus (FIG. 50), after executing the addition process in step S2801, the effect side addition period process is executed (step S2802). FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the processing for the additional period on the production side.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the effect side addition period counter of the effect side RAM 94 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the effect side addition period is in effect (step S3001). When the value of the effect side addition period counter is "0" and not the effect side addition period (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not the start command of the effect side addition period has been received (step S3002).

The start command of the addition period is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the addition period is started as described above. When the start command of the addition period is received (step S3002: YES), the effect setting process of the addition period is executed (step S3003). In the effect setting process of the addition period, information corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games of the addition period, is set in the effect side addition period counter of the effect side RAM 94. Further, in the effect setting process of the addition period, the data table for executing the addition effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. As already described, the data table has a data range corresponding to each of 1 game to 10 games. For example, in the case of the first game of the production side addition period, the data range of the first game in the above data table is the reference target, and in the case of the second game of the production side addition period, the data range of the second game in the above data table. Is the reference target, and if it is the 10th game of the production side addition period, the data range of the 10th game in the above data table is the reference target.

When the value of the effect side addition period counter is 1 or more and the effect side addition period is set (step S3001: YES), it is determined whether or not the game start command is received (step S3004). The game start command is transmitted by executing step S713 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main MPU 72 as described above. That is, the game start command is transmitted when one game is newly started.

When the game start command is received (step S3004: YES), whether or not the number of bets of the game started this time is "2", or the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). Whether or not it is determined (step S3005). As described above, when the game is started in the situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3", the main MPU 72 has the first bet number in step S603 in the setting process (FIG. 15) at the start. When a command is transmitted and the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted in step S604 in the setting process at the time of disclosure (FIG. 15). .. When the second bet number command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S3005. Further, since the game start command includes information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating that the game is in the CB state is set in the game start command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3005. ..

As described above, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped in the main MPU 72. On the other hand, in order to allow the production corresponding to the addition period to proceed without discomfort, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the production side MPU 92 has an addition period. Proceed with the production corresponding to. Therefore, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is started (step S3004 and step S3005: YES) in the production side addition period (step S3001: YES), in steps S3006 to S3008. Execute the process for advancing the additional period on the production side.

Specifically, first, the minimum number of games is selected as the number of games to be added (step S3006). As described above, the main MPU 72 executes the second additional lottery process (step S2614) in each game during the additional period, and in the second additional lottery process (step S2614), any one of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games is executed. Be selected. That is, in step S3006, 10 games, which is the minimum number of these games, are selected. Then, the information corresponding to the selected 10 games is added to the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3007). The number of games in the image display device 63 The number of games in the image G32 increases by adding the value of the continuous game number counter for display. As a result, even in a situation where the progress of the addition period in the main MPU 72 is stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the addition of the number of games in the addition period has occurred due to the execution of this game. When the number of games is added, the player is notified of the number of games to be added before the display is updated so that the number of games in the number of games image G32 increases.

Here, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped, whereas the addition period on the production side is In the case of a progressive configuration, the addition period will be continued even after the addition period on the production side has ended. In this case, in the game of the continuous addition period, the second addition lottery process (step S2614) is executed to generate additions of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games. On the other hand, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period as described above, the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 is set. Information corresponding to 10 games, which is the minimum number of games to be added, is added. As a result, even if an effect indicating that the number of games has been added is executed when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, it is actually in the addition period. It is possible to prevent the notification that the number of games given is larger than the number of additional games given to the player.

In addition, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the addition period, the value of the continuous game number counter for display is added, while the number of continuous games for grasping. The counter value is not added. Further, as described above, when the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in the addition period is executed by the main MPU 72 in a situation other than the production side addition period and the third addition command is transmitted, the third addition command is transmitted. Information corresponding to the number of additional games set in is added to the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping (step S2912). Therefore, it is possible to match the number of games grasped as the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the production side MPU 92 with the number of remaining continuous games managed by the main side MPU 72.

After that, the progress processing of the additional effect is executed (step S3008). The processing content of the progress processing of the addition effect is the same as the progress process of the addition effect in step S2911 in the addition process (FIG. 51). Specifically, in the progress processing of the additional effect, the value of the additional period counter on the effect side is subtracted by 1. In addition, the data range to be referred to in the data table for executing the additional effect read in the effect side RAM 94 is updated in accordance with the start of the new game this time. For example, in the case of the first game of the production side addition period, the data range of the first game in the above data table is the reference target, and in the case of the second game of the production side addition period, the data range of the second game in the above data table. Is the reference target, and if it is the 10th game of the production side addition period, the data range of the 10th game in the above data table is the reference target.

Returning to the description of the effect control process for the pseudo bonus (FIG. 50), after executing the effect side addition period process in step S2802, it is determined whether or not the game start command has been received (step S2803). The game start command is transmitted by executing step S713 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main MPU 72 as described above. That is, the game start command is transmitted when one game is newly started.

When the game start command is received (step S2803: YES), whether or not the number of bets of the game started this time is "2", or the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). Whether or not it is determined (step S2804). As described above, when the game is started in the situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3", the main MPU 72 has the first bet number in step S603 in the setting process (FIG. 15) at the start. When a command is transmitted and the game is started in a situation where the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted in step S604 in the setting process at the time of disclosure (FIG. 15). .. When the second bet number command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step S2804. Further, since the game start command includes information corresponding to the current game state, if information indicating that the game is in the CB state is set in the game start command, an affirmative determination is made in step S2804. ..

If a negative determination is made in step S2804, it means that one game has been digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 managed by the main MPU 72. Therefore, the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping and the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 are each subtracted by 1 (step S2805).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, it means that a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the main MPU 72 does not treat the game as a game executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. On the other hand, in order to facilitate the progress of the production in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the production side MPU 92 even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The production corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is advanced. Therefore, in step S2806, the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1, whereas the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping in the effect side RAM 94 is not subtracted by 1. As a result, the image display device 63 this time, while matching the number of games grasped as the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the production side MPU 92 with the number of remaining continuous games managed by the main side MPU 72. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of remaining continuous games has decreased with the execution of the game.

When the process of step S2805 or the process of step S2806 is executed, the progress process of the pseudo bonus effect is executed (step S2807). In the progress processing of the pseudo-bonus effect, the data range to be referred to in the first pseudo-bonus data table or the second pseudo-bonus data table read into the effect side RAM 94 is set corresponding to the next game. Update to the data range. As a result, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 progresses with the start of a new game.

After that, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is 1 or more. (Step S2809). As described above, when the second addition command is transmitted by the additional winning in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) executed by the main MPU 72, the stock lottery process (stock lottery process) by the directing MPU 92 (step S2610). When step S2904) is executed and the stock is won, the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S2610) is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping, while being displayed. It is not added to the continuous game counter. Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed during the addition period, among the number of addition target games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S2614) in the main MPU 72. While the minimum number of games is added to the continuous game number counter for display, in the second additional lottery process (step S2614) in the game executed in the situation where it is the additional period after that and not the additional period on the production side. Therefore, a number of games larger than the above minimum number of games may be selected, and the selected number of games is added to the continuous game number counter for grasping. Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the value of the continuous game number counter for display is subtracted by 1, whereas the value for grasping is used. The value of the continuous game counter is not subtracted. That is, in the situation where the number of games image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, the number of games displayed on the number of games image G32 is smaller than the actual number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Can occur.

When the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is "0" (step S2809: NO), the pseudo bonus state ST4 Means that is finished. In this case, the pre-end effect setting process is executed (step S2810). In the pre-end effect setting process, a data table for executing the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends in this game is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is started in the image display device 63, and the effect corresponding to the display effect is executed in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62.

When the value of the continuous game number counter for display is "0" (step S2808: YES) and the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is 1 or more (step S2809: YES), the effect of the effect side RAM 94 is produced. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the side ending flag (step S2811). As already described, the production side ending flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If "1" is not set in the production side ending flag in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, and "1" is set in the production side ending flag in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If this is the case, the number of games image G32 is not displayed on the image display device 63.

When "1" is set in the ending flag on the production side (step S2811: YES), since the game number image G32 is not displayed on the image display device 63 in the first place, the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is set. Even if the value of the continuous game number counter for display becomes "0" in a situation where the value is 1 or more and the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues, the player is not notified that the situation is reached. Therefore, in this case, by not executing the processes of steps S2812 to S2815, the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that has been executed up to that point is continued as it is.

When "1" is not set in the ending flag on the production side (step S2811: NO), the number of games image G32 is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the value of the continuous game number counter for grasping is 1. As described above, the number of games displayed on the number of games image G32 becomes "0" in the situation where the pseudo-bonus state ST4 continues. In this case, by executing the processes of steps S2812 to S2815, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued is executed.

Specifically, first, the execution lottery process of the revival effect is executed (step S2812). Execution of revival effect In the lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether to execute the normal continuation effect or the revival effect as an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued. In the normal continuous production, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed on the number of games image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued. , An effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping has been assigned is executed. Then, the number of games displayed as the grant target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed on the game number image G32.

In the revival effect, a pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends after the current game is started and the number of games displayed on the image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0" is provided. To be started. Then, when the game ends and a new game is started, it corresponds to the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is actually continued and the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping. An effect indicating that the number of games to be played has been given is executed. Then, the number of games displayed as the grant target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed on the game number image G32.

In the execution lottery process of the revival effect (step S2812), there is a 20% probability that the revival effect will be executed and won. Execution of revival effect If the winner is not won (step S2813: NO), the setting process of the normal continuous effect is executed (step S2814). In the setting process of the normal continuous effect, after the current game is started and the number of games displayed on the number of games image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is continued. The effect shown and the effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping has been assigned are executed, and the number of games displayed as the addition target in the effect is the game. A data table for adding to the number of games displayed on the number image G32 is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. Further, in the setting process of the normal continuous effect, the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping is set in the continuous game number counter for display.

When the execution of the revival effect is won (step S2813: YES). The setting process of the resurrection effect is executed (step S2815). In the revival effect setting process, the end indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends after the current game is started and the number of games displayed on the image G32 of the image display device 63 becomes "0". When the pre-production is started and the game ends and a new game is started, the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is actually continued and the continuous game number counter for grasping are set. An effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the set value has been assigned is executed, and the number of games displayed as the addition target in the effect is added to the number of games displayed in the number of games image G32. A data table for making the above is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. Further, in the setting process of the revival effect, the value set in the continuous game number counter for grasping is set in the continuous game number counter for display.

In the effect control process for the pseudo bonus, in addition to each of the above processes, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the ending command is received (step S2816). When the ending command is received (step S2816: YES), the process of hiding the number of remaining games is executed (step S2817). In the process of hiding the number of remaining games, "1" is set in the production side ending flag of the production side RAM 94. Further, the number of games image G32 displayed on the image display device 63 is prevented from being displayed. As a result, if there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 will be satisfied in the process of progressing the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will not be notified. It becomes possible to.

In the effect control process for the pseudo-bonus, in addition to each of the above processes, it is determined in step S2818 whether or not the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the second section initialization command is received (step S2818). As already explained, the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is normally performed without intervening the end preparation state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends in the situation where the second section SC2 continues even after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. This is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when shifting to the game state ST1. Further, as described above, the second section initialization command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2818, the end effect setting process is executed (step S2819). In the end effect setting process, a data table for executing the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is generated from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 after the effect indicating the transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Is read out. As a result, after the effect indicating the transition to the normal game state ST1 is executed in the image display device 63, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed, and the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 correspond to the display effect. The production to be performed is executed.

Next, how the pseudo-bonus state ST4 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 (a) shows a period in which one game is executed, FIG. 53 (b) shows a period in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is present, and FIG. 53 (c) shows a period in which the normal game state is ST1. (D) shows the period during which the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is executed, and FIG. 53 (e) shows the period during which the resurrection effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 continues is executed. 53 (f) shows a period in which the end preparation state ST5 is in effect, and FIG. 53 (g) shows a period in which the section display unit 67 is in the lit state.

First, the case where the revival effect is executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at the timing before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state even at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 53 (g). It has become.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 53A, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this game, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, but the value of the continuous game number counter for display in the effect side RAM 94 is "0", and the game in the image display device 63. The number of games in the number image G32 is "0". Then, it is decided to execute the revival effect in the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is started at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started. FIG. 54A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the pre-end effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 54A, in the pre-end effect, the pre-end image G51 indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is displayed. The image display device 63 displays the game number image G32 and the acquired number image G33 separately from the pre-end image G51, and the number of games displayed on the game number image G32 is “0”.

Then, at the timing of t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 53 (a). In this case, at the timing of t3, the pre-end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 53 (d), and the revival effect is started as shown in FIG. 53 (e). FIG. 54B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the revival effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 54B, in the resurrection effect, the resurrection image G52 indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not end but the pseudo bonus state ST4 continues is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player who has recognized that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends by the pre-end effect recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 actually continues. Further, in the revival effect, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is notified, and the notified number of games is added to the number of games displayed on the number of games image G32. The section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state as shown in FIG. 53 (g) during all the above periods.

Next, a case where the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends will be described.

At the timing of t4, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at the timing before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state even at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 53 (g). It has become.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 53A, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This game is the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is started at the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the current game is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the pre-end effect is ended at the timing of t6, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is stopped.

This time, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 does not end. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) at the timing of t6, the normal game state ST1 is started without ending the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and shifting to the end preparation state ST5. Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (g), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state during all the above periods. After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 53A, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

When the second section SC2 continues after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as described above, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section display unit 67 is lit even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped. As a result, even if the section display unit 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end effect is executed, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. I can't specify that. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the revival effect at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the pre-end effect is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will continue.

Next, a case where the second section SC2 also ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends will be described.

At the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 53A, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST4 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at the timing before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state even at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 53 (g). It has become.

After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 53A, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This game is the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the pre-end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends is started at the timing of t9, which is the timing at which the current game is started. After that, at the timing of t10, which is the end timing after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is stopped, the pre-end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 53 (d). ..

This time, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (f), the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and shifts to the end preparation state ST5. After that, in the end preparation state ST5, the game is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 53 (a). Then, at the timing of t12 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 53 (c) and 53 (f). Further, at the timing of t12, the section display unit 67 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG. 53 (g). After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 53A, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

At the timing of t10, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 of this time ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is started. This effect is continued until the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST5 ends. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the pre-end effect is continued until the next game is started for the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is finished, and when the next game is started, this time. The configuration may be such that the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 is started.

If the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends as described above, the end preparation state ST5 of one game is set after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, and the section in the end preparation state ST5. The display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section display unit 67 is lit even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped. As a result, even if the section display unit 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which the pre-end effect is executed, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. I can't specify that. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to execute the revival effect at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the pre-end effect is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will continue.

Next, a state in which the addition of the number of games occurs during the addition period and a state in which the addition of the number of games is notified will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) shows a situation in which the additional period is managed by the main MPU 72, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a period in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. c) shows the period during which the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, and FIG. 55 (d) shows the situation in which the effect side addition period is managed by the effect side MPU 92, and FIG. 55 (e) shows. ) Indicates the timing at which the addition of the number of games occurred, FIG. 55 (f) indicates the timing at which the addition effect progresses as the game is digested, and FIG. 55 (g) indicates that the number of games has been added. Indicates the timing.

First, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" and the game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) are not executed in the middle of the addition period will be described.

At the timing of t1, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55 (a), and the addition period on the production side is started as shown in FIG. 55 (d). After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed in the addition period including the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. 55 (f), each game is started. Along with this, the production of the addition period progresses, and as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the number of games to be added is notified in each of the games. Then, when the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period becomes "0" at the timing of t5, the addition period ends as shown in FIG. 55 (a) and the addition side is added as shown in FIG. 55 (d). The period ends.

Next, a case where a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the middle of the addition period will be described.

At the timing of t6, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 55 (a), and the addition period on the production side is started as shown in FIG. 55 (d). After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed at the timing of t7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the effect of the additional period progresses with the start of the game. , As shown in FIG. 55 (f), the number of games to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed at each of the timing of t8 and the timing of t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the addition of the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in each game, but as shown in FIG. 55 (f), the addition period is added with the start of each game. The production progresses, and as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the number of additional games is notified for each game. The number of additional games notified here can be selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2614) when a game in which the number of bets is "3" and is not in the CB state is executed during the additional period. It is the minimum number of games (specifically, 10 games).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed in the addition period including the timing of t10 and the timing of t11. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is added, and as shown in FIG. 55 (f), each game is started. Along with this, the production of the addition period progresses, and as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the number of games to be added is notified in each of the games. Then, when the number of continuous games remaining in the production side addition period measured by the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t12 becomes "0", the production side addition period ends as shown in FIG. 55 (d). .. In this case, in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, the effect indicating that the addition period is reached is terminated, and the execution of the effect corresponding to the situation corresponding to the situation in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is not the addition period, is resumed. NS. However, since the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period measured by the main MPU 72 is still 1 or more, the additional period is continued as shown in FIG. 55 (a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed at each of the timing of t13 and the timing of t14. In this case, when each game is started as shown in FIG. 55 (e), the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is added, but as shown in FIG. 55 (d), it is already in the addition period. The corresponding effect has been completed, and as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the number of games to be added in each game is not notified. Therefore, although the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is actually added, it is not notified to the player. Further, the number of additional games given at each of the timing of t13 and the timing of t14 is equal to or greater than the number of additional games notified at the timing of t8 and the timing of t9 in which the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It is the number of games.

At the timing of t15, the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period measured by the main MPU 72 becomes "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the addition period ends at the timing of t15.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the second section SC2. Therefore, the player who expects the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is expected to be in the second section SC2. In this case, the second section SC2 may be continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, and the game state may shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the continued second section SC2. be. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is once terminated, it is possible to expect the player to further generate the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not "0", the pseudo-bonus state is accompanied by the end of the second section SC2. ST4 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, there is a case where the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, but also a case where both the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

In the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1, when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of second reference games, which is the number of games less than the maximum number of games, or with restrictions on the game medium. When the total net increase number is equal to or greater than the second standard acquisition number, which is less than the upper limit net increase number, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly set. As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 and the end condition of the second section SC2 is almost satisfied, the benefit of generating the pseudo bonus state ST4 is given. Is possible. Therefore, even after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, even though the second section SC2 continues, the second section SC2 does not end without further transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It becomes possible to do.

The number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is less than the maximum number of games. If the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends in a situation where the number of acquisitions exceeds one standard, the second section SC2 also ends. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is near to be satisfied, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. Therefore, despite the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is immediately satisfied, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 also ends with the end of the second section SC2. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

The number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is less than the maximum number of games. In a situation where the number of acquired games is 1 or more, the number of games is not added to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 even if an additional opportunity occurs. As a result, even though the number of games has been added, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied before the number of games added is consumed, and a pseudo bonus is given with the end of the second section SC2. It is possible to prevent the event that the state ST4 is also terminated.

The number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is less than the maximum number of games. In the situation where one standard acquisition number or more is obtained, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not notified. As a result, when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied even though the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, the player feels uncomfortable when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

In the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more, "1" is not set in any of the first to third transition confirmation flags. If the index value IV = 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the transition waiting period, which is one of the periods in which the value of the unlocked game counter 74e is 5 or less in the situation, the right reel A notification (hereinafter, also referred to as a special notification) that makes the player recognizable that the 32R should be stopped first is executed. Then, in this situation, the special bell winning can be established by stopping the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the right reel 32R. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is approaching by using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Even if the special bell prize is established during the transition waiting period, the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur until the predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) are exhausted during the transition waiting period. The transition waiting period continues. As a result, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is used to indicate that the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is approaching without affecting the transition timing of the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to notify the player.

If a special bell prize is established during the transition waiting period, the special notification is not executed even if the index value IV = 10 is re-winned in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the transition waiting period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special notification from being excessively executed for the player who is aware that the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is approaching due to the establishment of the special bell prize. It will be possible.

If the special bell prize is not established for the fact that the index value IV = 10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the transition waiting period and the special notification is executed, the winning combination is selected in the transition waiting period. When the index value IV = 10 is won again in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the special notification is executed again. This makes it possible to increase the chances of winning a special bell during the transition waiting period.

When the transition waiting period elapses without winning the index value IV = 10 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the image display device 63 or the like executes a definite effect at the time of non-winning. As a result, even if the index value IV = 10 is not won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) during the transition waiting period, the player is made to recognize that the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur. Is possible.

When the index value IV = 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in a situation other than the transition waiting period, a notification is made so that the player can recognize that the left reel 32L should be stopped first (hereinafter, predetermined). (Also called notification) is executed. Then, in this situation, the first bell winning is established by stopping the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so as to first stop the left reel 32L. As a result, the special bell prize will be established during the transition waiting period, and it will be possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the special bell prize.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be added, and if added, the number of games required until the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends increases. Therefore, the player expects the addition to occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the above addition may occur in the target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3", which is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3), whereas the non-target game (first CB state ST2, In the second CB state ST3, the game in which the number of bets is "2"), the above addition does not occur. This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on the situations in which the above addition can be executed.

In a game in which the number of bets is "3", the above addition may occur, whereas in a game in which the number of bets is "2", the above addition does not occur. This makes it possible for the player to play a game in which the number of bets is basically "3".

In a configuration in which a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous to the player than a game with a bet number of "2", the above addition may occur in a game with a bet number of "3". On the other hand, in a game in which the number of bets is "2", the above addition does not occur. As a result, by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3" in order to make the situation advantageous, the above addition can be naturally executed.

Even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period, not only the above addition is not executed, but also when the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the addition period itself does not proceed. As a result, even if the non-target game is accidentally executed during the addition period, the event that the addition period progresses even though the above addition is not executed does not occur. It becomes possible to do so.

During the addition period, the addition effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the additional period. In this case, when the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped, while the progress of the addition period on the production side is continued. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped in the non-target game, whereas the addition period on the production side is advanced, so that the game is before the end of the addition period. The additional period on the production side ends in the game. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period, it is possible to execute the addition effect corresponding to the predetermined number of games.

Even after the addition period on the production side has ended, if the addition is executed when the addition period continues, the player is not notified that the addition has occurred. As a result, it is possible not to give a sense of discomfort to the player who recognizes that the addition period has already ended because the addition period on the production side has already ended.

In the configuration where the above addition occurs in each game during the addition period, when the non-target game is executed during the production side addition period, the above addition is not actually executed, but in each game during the addition period. Notification indicating that the minimum number of games to be added has been added is executed. As a result, while giving the player the impression that the above-mentioned addition occurs in each game during the addition period, the notification that the number of addition games is given is larger than the number of addition games actually given during the addition period. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

When the non-target game is executed, the above addition is not executed, whereas the process for approaching the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of disadvantage of executing the non-target game.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 56 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols for which the first CB prize is established and a combination of symbols for which the second CB prize is established in the present embodiment.

As for the combination of the symbols that win the second CB, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "white 7" on the main line ML, as in the first embodiment. It is a combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol. In the left reel 32L, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Further, in the middle reel 32M, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Become. Further, in the right reel 32R, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML. Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established even in the situation where the second CB combination is won.

On the other hand, the combination of the symbols that win the first CB prize is different from the first embodiment, and the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML. This is a combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol. In the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. .. Further, in the middle reel 32M, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. Is. Further, in the right reel 32R, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. Is. Therefore, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

FIG. 56B is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB combination or the second CB combination is won. FIG. 56 (b1) shows the period during which the game with the number of bets "3" is executed, and FIG. 56 (b2) shows the period during which the game with the number of bets "2" is executed. ) Indicates the period during which the first CB combination is in the winning state, FIG. 56 (b4) indicates the period during which the second CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 56 (b5) indicates the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state. The period of ST3 is shown.

First, a case where the first CB combination is won will be described.

As shown in FIG. 56 (b1), at the timing of t1, which is a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the all clear processing (step S105) is executed on the main MPU 72. The game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 56 (b3). After that, at the timing of t2, this game ends as shown in FIG. 56 (b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that won the first CB combination and establishes the first CB prize in this game is a combination of symbols that does not cause so-called omission. Therefore, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t2, the winning state of the first CB combination is released as shown in FIG. 56 (b3), and the first CB state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 56 (b5). Will be done.

Next, a case where the second CB combination is won will be described.

As shown in FIG. 56 (b2), at the timing of t3, which is a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the all clear processing (step S105) is executed on the main MPU 72. The game in which the number of bets is "2" is started. In this case, at the timing of t3, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 56 (b4). After that, the game ends, but the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize is a combination of symbols that may cause so-called omission, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB prize. As a result, the second CB prize is not established. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t4, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are also pressed at the stop operation timing at which the second CB winning is not established in the game. The second CB prize is not established by being operated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started at the timing of t5 and the timing of t6, which are the situations where the second CB combination is won. However, in a game in which the number of bets is "3" even in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. do not. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t7, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are also pressed at the stop operation timing at which the second CB winning is not established in the game. The second CB prize is not established by being operated.

According to the above configuration, the game is performed by a normal game method in which the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed first, the second CB combination is won, and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Instead, if the game is played by an unusual game method of executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a situation where the second CB role is not won, the first CB role is won. The first CB prize is surely established in the game, and the player shifts to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, even if an illegal profit is obtained by playing a game in which the number of bets is "3" after illegally executing the all clearing process (step S105), the transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to obtain fraudulent profits.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting from one of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 to the other are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3101). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3101: YES), the processes after step S3102 are not executed. As a result, when it is already the second section SC2, it is possible to prevent the process for newly setting the game section in the second section SC2 in steps S3105 to S3108 from being executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3102). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3102: YES), the processes after step S3103 are not executed. As a result, even if the first section SC1 is in the CB state, it is possible to prevent the process for newly setting the game section in the second section SC2 in steps S3105 to S3108 from being executed. Will be.

When the current game state is not the CB state (step S3102: NO), the number of bets in this game is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3103). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3103: NO), the processes after step S3104 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for newly setting the game section in the second section SC2 in steps S3105-step S3108 is not executed. It becomes possible to do.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3103: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S3104). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is out of order (step S3104: NO), the processes after step S3105 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if the winning combination is missed in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the game section in steps S3105-step S3108 is newly set in the second section SC2. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination (step S3104: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c and the total acquisition number counter 74d in "0" (step S3105). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

After that, "1" is set in the branch standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3106). The branch standby flag indicates that the state after shifting to the second section SC2 is either a state in which the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 or a state in which the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is a period in which it has not been determined whether or not the state is to be set. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2, a pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, and the second When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the game following the game shifted to the two-section SC2, the normal game state ST1 is continued. In the situation where "1" is set in the branch waiting flag, the branch in the game state has not yet occurred after the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred.

After that, "1" is set in the branch standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3107). The branch standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a new game has been started in a situation where the branch standby flag is set to "1". When one game ends in a situation where the branch standby flag is set to "1", the value of the branch standby counter is subtracted by 1, and the value of the branch standby counter becomes "0". Then, when the next game ends, the number of bets in the game is set by specifying that "1" is set in the branch waiting flag and the value of the branch waiting counter is "0". The distribution of the corresponding game state is executed.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3108). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a normal process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

When "1" is set in the branch standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3201: YES), and when the value of the branch standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3202: NO), the game of this time. Since it means that the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred at the start, the value of the branch standby counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3203), and then the normal processing is terminated. As a result, in the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs, either the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 or the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. No distribution is done.

On the other hand, if the branch wait flag is set to "1" (step S3201: YES) and the branch wait counter value is "0" (step S3202: YES), this game is the second. Since it means that the game is the next game after the game in which the transition to the section SC2 has occurred, the branch waiting flag is cleared to "0" (step S3204). Then, when the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3205: YES), the process for starting the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in steps S3206 and S3207 is executed, and the number of bets in the current game is executed. When is "2" (step S3205: NO), the process for continuing the normal game state ST1 in step S3208 and step S3209 is executed.

As a process for starting the pseudo-bonus state ST4, first, a start setting process is executed (step S3206). In the start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74, and 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, are set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. Set the value corresponding to. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter sets the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the main MPU 72. It is a counter for specifying at.

After that, the start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3207). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been newly started. In addition, the start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is 40 games. When the start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, displays the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Is displayed.

As a process for continuing the normal game state ST1, first, a lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S3208). The number of released games is the first section SC1 after the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 is completed when the release winning of the normal game state ST1 is not obtained in the release lottery process (step S3218) described later. It is a counter for specifying the number of games required until the transition to occurs on the main MPU 72. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S3209). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

In the normal processing (FIG. 58), when "1" is not set in the branch standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3201: NO), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74. On the condition that the game section of is the second section SC2 (step S3210: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3211). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3211: YES), the processes after step S3212 are not executed. In the processes after step S3212, a process of subtracting the number of games required to end the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 is executed as one game is digested, and the game is digested. When the end condition of the situation is satisfied, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed. In this case, in the case of the CB state, by not executing the processing after step S3212, even if the game is digested in the CB state, it is the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the end closer.

If it is not in the CB state (step S3211: NO), the number of bets in this game is "3" by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Whether or not it is determined (step S3212). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3212: NO), the processes after step S3213 are not executed. As described above, in the processes after step S3213, the process of subtracting the number of games required to end the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 is executed and the game is executed. When the end condition of the situation is satisfied due to the digestion, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number "2" is executed, the process after step S3213 is not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number "2" is digested, it is the first. It is possible to prevent the two-section SC2 from becoming a factor that approaches the end of the situation in which the normal game state is ST1.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3212: YES), the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3213). Then, when the value of the release game number counter 74e after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3214: YES), the setting process of the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3215). In the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation status flag of the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST5, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3216). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag. In the case (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the game section in this game is executed. The second control process (FIG. 38) is terminated. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends. If the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the value of the release game number counter 74e becomes "0", the second section SC2 may be terminated in that game.

When the value of the release game number counter 74e after 1 subtraction is not "0" (step S3214: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 was won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination. Whether or not it is determined (step S3217). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3217, the release lottery process is executed (step S3218). In the release lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to end the second section SC2 by using the release lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the second section SC2 will be terminated and the index value IV = 12. If you win, you have a 10% chance of ending the second section SC2. If you win the index value IV = 13, you have a 40% chance of ending the second section SC2. If the index value IV = 14 is won, the probability of ending the second section SC2 is 30%, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, the probability of the second section SC2 is 20%. It will be a cancellation win to end the 2 section SC2. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of being a release winning to end the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process (step S3219: YES), the setting process of the end preparation state ST5 is executed in step S3215, and the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3216. do. The processing contents of steps S3215 and S3216 have already been described. As a result, the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5, and the second section SC2 ends in the next game of this game to shift to the first section SC1. If the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the release is won in the release lottery process, the second section SC2 may be terminated in the game.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In steps S3301 to S3308, the same process as in steps S2701 to S2708 of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment is executed. When a negative determination is made in step S3304, when the process of step S3307 is executed, or when the process of step S3308 is executed, whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" is determined. Determine (step S3309). When the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S3309: YES), the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). After that, the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S3311).

As already explained, the number of released games is the first after the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 is completed when the release of the normal game state ST1 is not won in the release lottery process (step S3216). This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the section SC1 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3312).

After that, the end command of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3313). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended. When the production side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the upper lamp 61, so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed. It controls the speaker 62 and the image display device 63.

Next, how the second section SC2 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 60 (a) shows the situation of the second section SC2, FIG. 60 (b) shows the period during which the game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed, and FIG. 60 (c) shows the period in which the number of bets is “3”. 2 ”shows the period during which the game is being executed, FIG. 60 (d) shows the period in which the normal game state is ST1, and FIG. 60 (e) shows the period in which the pseudo-bonus state is ST4. ) Indicates the timing at which the number of remaining released games becomes “0”, and FIG. 60 (g) indicates the timing at which the release is won in the release lottery process (step S3218).

In the situation of the first section SC1, the game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 60 (b). The game is not in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), but in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination executed in the game, any combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60 (a).

After that, the next game is started at the timing of t2 with respect to the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at the timing of t2 is a game in which the number of bets is "2" as shown in FIG. 60 (c). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, either the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 or the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. A branch will occur. When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as the game, the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 continues as shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (d). It will be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60B, the game in which the number of bets is "3" including the timing of t3 and the timing of t4 is repeated. Then, when the game in which the number of bets started at the timing of t4 is "3" is executed, the remaining release game is executed at the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIG. 60 (f). The number is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 60A, the second section SC2 ends and the game section becomes the first section SC1. That is, it is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, in the situation of the first section SC1, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 60 (b). The game is not in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), but in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination executed in the game, any combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 60A.

After that, the next game is started at the timing of t7 with respect to the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred. In this case, the game started at the timing of t7 is a game in which the number of bets is "3" as shown in FIG. 60 (b). In the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred, either the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 or the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. A branch will occur. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as the game, the normal game state ST1 is shown in FIGS. 60 (d) and 60 (e) at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the game ends. Ends and shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60B, the game in which the number of bets is "3" including the timing of t9 and the timing of t10 is repeated. Then, when the game in which the number of bets started at the timing of t10 is "3" is executed, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0" at the timing of t11, which is the timing at which the game ends. ". Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 60 (d) and 60 (e), the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends and the normal game state ST1 starts. That is, the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60B, the game in which the number of bets is "3" including the timing of t12 and the timing of t13 is repeated. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), the release is won in the release lottery process (step S3218) executed at the timing of t14, which is the end timing of the game in which the number of bets started at the timing of t13 is “3”. As a result, at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends and the game section becomes the first section SC1 as shown in FIG. 60 (a). That is, it is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

In the situation where the second section SC2 is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the total net increase of the limited number of game media in the second section SC2 is the upper limit net increase. When the number of sheets is reached, the second section SC2 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are terminated, and the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1. Further, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the total net increase of the limited number of game media in the second section SC2 is the upper limit net increase. When the number of sheets is reached, the second section SC2 ends, and the situation is such that the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Although the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur again in the continued second section SC2. As a result, while the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is newly started is fixed, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restricted after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is once completed. It can be forcibly generated.

The second section SC2 ends based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1. Then, when the second section SC2 ends, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur as the second section SC2 is newly started. Therefore, the player expects that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

In a configuration in which the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the number of games to be released determined when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends has been exhausted. Based on this, the second section SC2 ends. As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, the player expects that the digestion of the number of released games is completed at an early stage.

In a configuration in which the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed, the second section SC2 ends when the release is won in the release lottery process (step S3218). As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1, the player is determined that the release lottery process (step S3218) is executed and that the release lottery process (step S3218) is the release winning. You will expect it.

When the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 1 or more, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 also ends with the end of the second section SC2. do. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, there is a case where the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, but also a case where both the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 end. This makes it possible to diversify whether or not the second section SC2 is continued when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

A transition of the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur based on the start of the second section SC2. As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1, the player expects the second section SC2 to end early.

The game next to the game in which the second section SC2 is started becomes the game to be branched, and the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as the game to be branched, so that the game state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Occurs. As a result, when the second section SC2 is newly started, it is basically possible to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

When a game having a bet number of "2" is executed as the game to be branched, the game is in the second section SC2 and is in the normal game state ST1. The manager of the game hall, who thinks that it is not preferable that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs immediately at the start of business of the game hall, generates the second section SC2 in advance and the number of bets in the game to be branched is increased. By executing the game of "2", it is possible to intentionally set the situation in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1.

In the second section SC2 generated by executing the game with the number of bets "2" as the game to be branched as described above and in the normal game state ST1, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. do not. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur for a while after the opening of the game hall.

The second section SC2 is generated based on the execution of the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the first section SC1. Therefore, it is considered that the player plays the game in the state where the number of bets is "3" even in the game to be branched. As a result, basically, when the second section SC2 is newly generated, it is possible to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the first section SC1, the combination is set in the second section SC2 based on winning any combination in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16). As a result, the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 can be generated at an early stage.

The game following the game set in the second section SC2 is not limited to the configuration in which the game is the target of branching, and the game set in the second section SC2 is two games later, three games later, or four. The game after the game may be configured to be a branching target game. Further, the number of games required from the game set in the second section SC2 until the game to be branched is generated may be determined by lottery.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a winning combination lottery process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S3401, similarly to step S701 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment, a random number used for determining whether or not the winning combination is obtained is acquired. After that, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3402). In the present embodiment, it is selected when the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state and the winning combination lottery table at the time of three bets and when the number of bets is "2" in the non-CB state. The content of the winning combination lottery table at the time of betting two cards is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card betting in the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination lottery table at the time of two-card betting in the present embodiment. Is.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting has an index value of "1 to 17" as the index value IV as in the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting (FIG. 17) in the first embodiment. It is set. The point value PV set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 17 is the same as the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 17) at the time of 3-card betting in the first embodiment. Further, the winning data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is the same as the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 17) at the time of three-card betting in the first embodiment. However, the type of winning data set to the index value IV = 17 is different from the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 17) at the time of 3-card betting in the first embodiment. Specifically, not only the first CB winning data but also the tenth supplementary winning data is set in the index value IV = 17.

FIG. 62B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that establishes the tenth supplementary prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the 10th supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the case of the 10th supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

As shown in FIG. 63, the winning combination lottery table at the time of two-card betting is set to "1 to 17" as the index value IV as in the winning combination lottery table at the time of two-card betting (FIG. 18) in the first embodiment. There is. The point value PV set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 17 is the same as the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 18) at the time of two-card betting in the first embodiment. Further, the winning data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is the same as the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 18) at the time of two-card betting in the first embodiment. However, the type of winning data set to the index value IV = 17 is different from the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 18) at the time of two-card betting in the first embodiment. Specifically, not only the second CB winning data but also the tenth supplementary winning data is set in the index value IV = 17.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode established when the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting or the winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting is selected. Is. As shown in FIG. 64, for the index values IV = 1 to 16, the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode to be established is the same as that of the first embodiment. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, the 1st CB prize or the 10th supplementary prize is established if the number of bets is "3" regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the number of bets is ". If it is "2", the second CB prize or the tenth supplementary prize is established.

The combination of symbols that establish the first CB prize and the combination of symbols that establish the second CB prize are set so as not to stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The combination of symbols that establishes the tenth supplementary prize is set to stop on the main line ML regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Then, when both the 1st CB winning data and the 10th supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, or when both the 2nd CB winning data and the 10th supplementary winning data are set in the main RAM 74, the first 10 The symbols that make up the combination of symbols that make up the supplementary prize have priority over the symbols that make up the combination of the symbols that make up the first CB prize and the symbols that make up the combination of the symbols that make up the second CB prize on the main line ML. Is stopped and displayed. Therefore, regardless of whether the number of bets is "3" or the number of bets is "2", if the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop order and The tenth supplementary prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and the establishment of the first CB prize or the second CB prize is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first CB prize or the second CB prize from being established in the game in which the index value IV = 17 is won.

When the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are stored in the main RAM 74, they are stored and held in the main RAM 74 until the corresponding CB winning is established. Therefore, even if the 10th supplementary prize is preferentially established in the game in which the index value IV = 17 is won, the state in which the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is stored in the next game. It will be carried over.

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61), after selecting the lottery table in step S3402 and setting the index value IV to "1" (step S3403), the determination value used when determining the winning or failing of the winning combination. DV is set (step S3404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number acquired in step S3401 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV = 1, which is the current index value IV, corresponds to the value of this random number. Is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV (step S3405). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S3405: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S3406), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S3407). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S3404 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S3404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S3405, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When "65535" is exceeded (step S3405: YES), after executing the first control process of the game section (step S3408), the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time is sent to the main RAM 74. The winning data acquisition process for setting is executed (step S3409). That is, in the present embodiment, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 17 is won, the first control process (step S3408) of the game section is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed. The first control process (step S3408) of the game section in the present embodiment will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S3407, or when the process of step S3409 is executed, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the stop information first setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S3410). After that, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S3411, the stop order notification control process is executed in step S3412, and the game start command transmission process is executed in step S3413. The processing contents of these steps S341 to S3413 are the same as those of step S709, step S710, step S712 and step S713 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section executed in step S3408 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3501). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3501: YES), the processes after step S3502 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S3506 and the lottery process for the number of released games in step S3510 are not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S3501: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3502). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3502: YES), the processes after step S3503 are not executed. As a result, even if the first section SC1 is in the CB state, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct hit lottery process in step S3506, and the lottery process for the number of released games in step S3510. Will not be executed.

When the current game state is not the CB state (step S3502: NO), the number of bets in this game is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3503). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3503: NO), the processes after step S3504 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even if it is the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3504, the direct hit lottery process in step S3506, and the release game in step S3510. The number lottery process will not be executed.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S3503: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the continuous game number counter 74c and the total acquisition number counter of the main RAM 74 are set. Clear each of 74d to "0" (step S3504). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

After that, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S3505). Here, as described above, in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61), the first control process (step S3408) of the game section is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed. Therefore, even if the winning combination is won at the index value IV = 17 in the role lottery process (FIG. 61) in this game, the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data set at the index value IV = 17 is still available. Since the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed before being stored in the main RAM 74, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, even if the game is won with an index value of IV = 17, a negative determination is made in step S3505. On the other hand, if the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 before the start of this game, an affirmative determination is made in step S3505.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3505, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S3506). In the direct hit lottery process, the direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is regularly updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to win the direct hit in the pseudo bonus state ST4 by lottery. do. In the role lottery process (Fig. 61) in this game, if an index value IV other than the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won, there is a 10% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be directly hit and the index will be won. If the value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly, and if the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 15% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly. If you win and the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 60% chance that you will win the pseudo bonus state ST4 directly, and if you win the index value IV = 14, there is a 30% chance that you will win the pseudo bonus. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 20% probability that the player will win the direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61), has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61).

When the direct hit is won in the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the direct hit lottery process (step S3507: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3508). Similar to the first embodiment, the first transition confirmation flag indicates that the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) executed when shifting to the second section SC2 has resulted in a direct hit to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This is a flag to be specified by the main MPU 72. When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game ends, as in the first embodiment.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3509). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S3507: NO), the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S3510). The number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the first embodiment. Is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3511).

After that, the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 is executed in the same manner as in step S1812 in the first control process (FIG. 37) of the game section in the first embodiment (step S3512). When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S3512) of the section display unit 67 (step S3513: YES), the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3514). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S3512) of the section display unit 67 (step S3513: NO), "1" is set in the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3515). .. The lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state.

Here, the value set in the release game number counter 74e is subtracted by 1 in step S2217 in the normal processing (FIG. 41) as in the first embodiment, and the value of the release game number counter 74e after 1 subtraction. When becomes "0" (step S2218: YES), the game state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4 by executing the first start setting process (step S2213). In this case, when the value of the release game number counter 74e becomes "0", regardless of whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in that game. By executing the first start setting process (step S2213), the game state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Further, even in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the second section SC2, the transition lottery process (step S2112) is executed in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game, and the transition is made. When the transition is won in the lottery process, the game state is shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST4 by executing the first start setting process (step S2213) in the normal process (FIG. 41).

That is, in the case of newly shifting to the second section SC2, if either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4. The direct hit lottery process (step S3506) for the purpose is not executed. On the other hand, in the situation where the second section SC2 continues, the state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4 regardless of whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Is executed. As a result, in the situation where the second section SC2 is newly started, it is constant that either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 regarding the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. While the condition is imposed, it is possible to prevent such a condition from being imposed on the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the second section SC2 continues.

Next, a state in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 66 (a) shows the period during which the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 66 (b) shows the period during which the game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed, and FIG. 66 (c) shows. Indicates the timing at which the winning combination lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed, FIG. 66 (d) indicates the timing at which the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed, and FIG. The main RAM 74 shows the period in which the CB winning data (first CB winning data or the second CB winning data) is stored, FIG. 66 (f) shows the situation of the second section SC2, and FIG. 66 (g) is normal. The period of the game state ST1 is shown, and FIG. 66 (h) shows the period of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

First, a case where the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed but the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur will be described.

When the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, and as shown in FIG. 66A, the main MPU 72 is transferred to the main MPU 72 at the timing of t1. The supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (f) and 66 (g), the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

Here, in the first embodiment, when the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), the first CB winning data is cleared and the second CB winning data is cleared. However, when the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared, but in the present embodiment, the partial clearing process (step S104) and all are cleared. Regardless of which of the clearing process (step S105) is executed, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are cleared. Therefore, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74. This time, since the set value update process (step S106) is not executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed because the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Is maintained in the memorized state.

After that, at the timing of t2, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66 (b). In this case, the winning combination lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). Win one of the index values IV in the lottery for the role. Therefore, at the timing of t4 thereafter, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 66 (f). Further, in the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed. However, since the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) does not result in a direct hit, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in this game, and the normal game state ST1 is maintained as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Will be done. Then, at the timing of t5, this game ends as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

Next, a case where the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs will be described.

When the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t6, so that the main MPU 72 is transferred to the main MPU 72 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 66A. The supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (f) and 66 (g), the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1. Further, since the set value update process (step S106) is not executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed because the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started this time, the main RAM 74 is CB. The state in which the winning data is stored is maintained.

After that, at the timing of t7, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started as shown in FIG. 66 (b). In this case, the winning combination lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). Win one of the index values IV in the lottery for the role. Therefore, at the timing of t9 thereafter, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 66 (f). Further, in the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed. Then, in the direct hit lottery process (step S3506), the direct hit is won. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 (g) and 66 (h), the game state shifts from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 at the timing of t10 when the current game ends.

Next, a case where the normal game state ST1 is continued without executing the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) will be described.

When the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t11, so that the main MPU 72 is transferred to the main MPU 72 at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 66 (a). The supply of operating power is started. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (f) and 66 (g), the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

Here, this time, the set value update process (step S106) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) executed by starting the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72. Therefore, since the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, the CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 66 (e). NS. That is, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. In this case, the winning combination lottery (steps S3401 to S3407) is executed at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). In the lottery of the winning combination, the index value IV = 17 in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data and the tenth supplementary winning data are set is won. Therefore, at the timing of t15 thereafter, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). As a result, the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 66 (f).

However, the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is executed before the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61). Therefore, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in this game, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the situation where the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is being executed. .. Therefore, the direct hit winning process (step S3506) is not executed in the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in this game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (g), the normal gaming state ST1 is maintained.

After that, the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) is executed at the timing of t16, which is the timing after the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section is completed, as shown in FIG. 66 (e). The CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Then, at the timing of t17, this game ends as shown in FIG. 66 (b).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The setting of the second section SC2 depends on whether or not the situation set in the second section SC2 is the situation in which the CB winning data (first CB winning data or the second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74. Occasionally, it is different whether or not a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can occur. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the setting in the second section SC2 but also to whether or not the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

When the supply of the operating power is started, the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, so that the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. On the other hand, even if the second section SC2 is completed, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 as a trigger. As a result, the transition mode to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed between the second section SC2 that is generated immediately after the supply of the operating power is started and the second section SC2 that is generated again after the second section SC2 has already been generated. It is possible to make a difference.

When the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, the set value update process (step S106) is executed. Therefore, immediately after the set value update process (step S106) is executed, the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, and if it is set in the second section SC2 in this situation, the second section is concerned. The transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur when SC2 is set. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after the set value update process (step S106) is illegally executed.

By winning the index value IV = 17 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61), the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, depending on whether or not the situation is after the index value IV = 17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61), the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the second section SC2 is set is entered. It is possible to make a difference in the presence or absence of.

Even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61), the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning data acquisition process (step S3409) for the winning of the index value IV = 17. Is stored, it is determined whether or not the CB winning data is set in the second section SC2 in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the first control process (FIG. 65) of the game section. As a result, in order to determine that the situation set in the second section SC2 is the situation in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the game prior to the game set in the second section SC2 It is necessary that the index value IV = 17 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61).

When the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of supplying the operating power, the main RAM 74 wins the CB because the partial clear process (step S104) or the entire clear process (step S105) is executed. The data is not stored, but in this case, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 61) in the game immediately after the start, the second section SC2 in the game. Since it is not determined that the second section SC2 is set in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 while being set to, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs when the second section SC2 is set. There is nothing to do. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from occurring immediately after the set value update process (step S106) is illegally executed.

When the index value IV = 17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61), not only the CB winning data but also the 10th supplementary winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the CB winning (1st CB winning or 1st CB winning or 1st) is stored. The establishment of the 10th supplementary prize is prioritized over the establishment of 2CB prize). As a result, the situation in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained until the game after the game in which the index value IV = 17 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 61). It becomes possible.

If the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur when the second section SC2 is set, while the main RAM 74 has. If the second section SC2 is set in a situation where the CB winning data is not stored, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur when the second section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74.

When the second section SC2 is set in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) is executed, and the direct hit winning occurs, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. On the other hand, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur unless the direct hit is won. As a result, even when the second section SC2 is set in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has not occurred when the setting to the second section SC2 is performed, the setting value update process (step S106) is executed from that. It is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not it is. Further, in the case of this configuration, the player expects to be set in the second section SC2 in a situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. If the second section SC2 is set in the situation, it is expected that the direct hit lottery process (step S3506) will result in a direct hit winning. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player pays attention to.

In the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), or the number of remaining released games is "0", and the CB is won in the main RAM 74. Regardless of whether or not the data is stored, the transition of the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. As a result, if the conditions required for the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 differ depending on whether the second section SC2 is newly set and the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1 continues. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in relation to the second section SC2.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of gaming states and the transition modes of gaming states in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 are set as the game sections as in the first embodiment, and the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the end preparation state ST5 are set as the game states. It is set. Further, although not shown in FIG. 67, a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 also exist as gaming states. In the present embodiment, in addition to the gaming state in the first embodiment, there are a first chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as a first CZ state) ST6 and a second chance zone state (hereinafter referred to as a second CZ state) ST7. There is.

Both the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 are gaming states that can stay when the gaming section is the second section SC2, and do not stay when the gaming section is the first section SC1. In the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, the transition lottery process (step S3707) in CZ, which will be described later, is executed in each game regardless of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and a pseudo bonus is obtained by winning the transition. A transition to the state ST4 will occur. In the normal game state ST1 which is neither the first CZ state ST6 nor the second CZ state ST7, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the normal transition lottery process is performed. (Step S3711) will be executed. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is set higher than the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the normal gaming state ST1. That is, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 than in the case where the second section SC2 is the normal game state ST1.

In each of the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7, the game in which the bet number is "3" in the non-CB state ends when 10 games in which the number of CZ continuous games is consumed are exhausted, but the first CZ state The probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 is 50%. When the first CZ state ST6 is completed without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the normal game state ST1 is set. That is, when the transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50%, and the normal gaming state ST1 is restored with a probability of 50%. Further, when the second CZ state ST7 is completed without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the end preparation state ST5 is set and then the first section SC1 is set. That is, when the transition to the second CZ state ST7 occurs, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50%, and the first section SC1 has a probability of 50%. The probability that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur in the first CZ state ST6 and the probability that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur in the second CZ state ST7 are the same. Further, as in the first embodiment, the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur.

The first CZ state ST6 is surely generated when the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2. That is, when the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the first CZ state ST6 is first set. When the first CZ state ST6 is reached, there is a 50% probability that the normal gaming state ST1 will occur, and then a 50% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur. The second CZ state ST7 is surely generated when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the second CZ state ST7 is reached, there is a 50% probability that the first section SC1 will occur, and then a 50% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will occur.

Here, if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the process shifts to the second CZ state ST7 as described above, but there is a 50% probability of going to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Even if the transition to the first section SC1 occurs via the end preparation state ST5 without the transition of the above, the first CZ state ST6 is subsequently reached with the transition to the second section SC2, and the first CZ state ST6 In the case of, a pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50%. That is, if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50% in the subsequent second CZ state ST7, and 50 Even if the transition to the first section SC1 occurs with a probability of%, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs with a probability of 50% in the first CZ state ST6 accompanying the subsequent transition to the second section SC2. Therefore, if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, there is a 75% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be re-shifted.

On the other hand, when the partial clear process (step S104) or the entire clear process (step S105) is executed and the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of supplying the operating power to the main MPU 72, the first It will start from the section SC1. In this case, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 is accompanied by the transition to the second section SC2, but as described above, the probability of the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 is 50%. .. Further, when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied and the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the first section SC1 is set without going through the second CZ state ST7. In this case, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 is accompanied by the transition to the second section SC2, but as described above, the probability of the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the first CZ state ST6 is 50%. ..

That is, if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, there is a 75% probability that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be restored again, whereas the operation to the main MPU 72 will occur. If the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of power supply, or if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subsequently transitioned to with a probability of 50%. As a result, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the operating power to the main MPU 72 is increased while relatively increasing the probability of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 again. When the set value update process (step S106) is executed at the start of supply or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the probability of shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can be relatively reduced.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the transition mode of the gaming state as described above will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3601). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when the second section flag is set to "1", the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3601: YES), the processing after step S3602 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the process for shifting the gaming state of step S3606 to the first CZ state ST6 is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S3601: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3602). ). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3602: YES), the processes after step S3603 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the gaming state in step S3606 are set to the first CZ state. The process for migrating to ST6 will not be executed.

When the current game state is not the CB state (step S3602: NO), the number of bets in this game is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3603). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3603: NO), the processes after step S3604 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the gaming state in step S3606 are shifted to the first CZ state ST6. The process for causing it to be executed will not be executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S3603: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S3604). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is out of order (step S3604: NO), the processes after step S3605 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if the winning combination is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S3605 and the game state in step S3606 are set. The process for shifting to the first CZ state ST6 will not be executed.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S3604: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c and the total acquisition number counter 74d in "0" (step S3605). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

After that, "1" is set in the first CZ flag provided in the main RAM 74, and "10" is set in the CZ counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3606). The first CZ flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the first CZ state ST6. The CZ counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining CZ continuous games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 by the main MPU 72.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S3607). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. Further, when the transition to the second section SC2 occurs, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 will surely occur, but when the transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, the section display unit 67 Can be turned on.

After that, the first CZ transition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3608). The first CZ transition command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize that the transition to the first CZ state ST6 has occurred. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the first CZ transition command, the effect corresponding to the first CZ state ST6 is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize whether or not the player is in the first CZ state ST6. The image display device 63 may be configured to display the remaining number of CZ continuous games in the first CZ state ST6.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3701). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main MPU 72, and "1" may be set in the second section flag. The second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S3701: NO), the processes after step S3702 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the process for shifting the gaming state from step S3706 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3701: YES) and the current game state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3702: YES), the pseudo bonus process at the start of the game is executed. (Step S3703). The processing content of the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S3701: YES) and the gaming state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S3702: NO), the current gaming state is the CB state (third). It is determined whether or not it is in the 1 CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) (step S3704). If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3704: YES), the processes after step S3705 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is in the CB state, the process for shifting the gaming state in the step S3706 or later to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

When the current game state is not the CB state (step S3704: NO), the number of bets in this game is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3705). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3705: NO), the processes after step S3706 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the process for shifting the gaming state in step S3706 or later to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S3705: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the first CZ flag or the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74. , It is determined whether or not the gaming state is either the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7 (step S3706). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3706, the transition lottery process during CZ is executed (step S3707). In the transition lottery process during CZ, a lottery process for whether or not to generate a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed with a winning probability corresponding to the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. In this case, the higher the index value IV, which has a lower winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability of winning the transfer in the transfer lottery process during CZ. In addition, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process during CZ is arbitrary, but in the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is reached by the time 10 games, which is the number of CZ continuous games, are exhausted. The probability of winning the transition is 50%.

When the transition is won (step S3708: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3709). The shift confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the game state is shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in both the first CZ flag and the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3706: NO), the index value IV = in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. On condition that any of 11 to 15 has been won (step S3710: YES), the normal transition lottery process is executed (step S3711). The processing content of the transition lottery process for normal use is the same as the transition lottery process of step S2112 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game in the first embodiment. When the transition is won (step S3712: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3713). As already described, the shift confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the game state is shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a normal process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S3801: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not (step S3802). If the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S3707) during CZ or the transition lottery process for normal use (step S3711) at the start of this game, "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag. ..

When "1" is set in the migration confirmation flag (step S3802: YES), the start setting process is executed (step S3803). In the start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74, and a value corresponding to 40 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. do. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter sets the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the main MPU 72. It is a counter for specifying at.

After that, the start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3804). The start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been newly started. In addition, the start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is 40 games. When the start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, displays the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Is displayed.

When "1" is not set in the transition confirmation flag (step S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) (step S3805). .. If the current gaming state is the CB state (step S3805: YES), the processes after step S3806 are not executed. In the process after step S3806, in the case of the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, the process of subtracting 1 from the remaining number of CZ continuous games is executed as one game is exhausted, and the remaining number of CZ continuous games is ". When it becomes "0", the process for terminating the current CZ state of the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 is executed. In addition, if the process of subtracting 1 from the number of games required to shift the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by 1 with the digestion of one game is executed and the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied with the digestion of the game, the relevant case is concerned. The process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, in the case of the CB state, by not executing the processing after step S3806, even if the game is digested in the CB state, it is a factor that approaches the end of the first CZ state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is also possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 closer.

When the current game state is not the CB state (step S3805: NO), the number of bets in this game is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". It is determined whether or not it is "3" (step S3806). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3806: NO), the processes after step S3807 are not executed. As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the processing after step S3807 is not executed, so that even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is digested, it is the first CZ. It is possible to prevent the factor from approaching the end of the state ST6 or the second CZ state ST7, and it is possible to prevent the factor from approaching the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S3806: YES), it is the first CZ state ST6 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the first CZ flag of the main RAM 74. Whether or not it is determined (step S3807). When "1" is set in the first CZ flag (step S3807: YES), the value of the CZ counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3808). Then, when the value of the CZ counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3809: YES), the first CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3810).

After that, the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S3811). The number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711). It is a counter for specifying in. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table for the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be set high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3812). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

When "1" is not set in the first CZ flag (step S3807: NO), it is the second CZ state ST7 by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second CZ flag of the main RAM 74. Whether or not it is determined (step S3813). When "1" is set in the second CZ flag (step S3813: YES), the value of the CZ counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3814). Then, when the value of the CZ counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3815: YES), the second CZ flag is cleared to "0" (step S3816).

After that, the setting process of the end preparation state ST5 is executed (step S3817). In the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation status flag of the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST5, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST5. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3818). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST5.

In the end preparation state ST5, as in the first embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag. In the case (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the game section in this game is executed. The second control process (FIG. 38) is terminated. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends. If the end preparation state ST5 is not set and the second CZ state ST7 ends, the second section SC2 may be ended in the game.

When "1" is not set in the second CZ flag (step S3813: NO), the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3819). Then, when the value of the release game number counter 74e after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3820: YES), the start setting process is executed (step S3821), and the start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3821). Step S3822). The processing contents of steps S3821 and S3822 are the same as those of step S3803 and step S3804.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processes after step S3902 are not executed. As a result, even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted, and the additional period in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is further increased. The number of continuous games remaining in is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the CB state is CB. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the game shifts to the CB state in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. ..

When the number of bets on the number of games this time is "3" (step S3901: YES), other processing is executed (step S3902). In other processes, the same processes as those in steps S2703 to S2708 of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment are executed.

After that, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3903). Then, when the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3904: YES), the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3905). As a result, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends. After that, "1" is set in the second CZ flag provided in the main RAM 74, and "10" is set in the CZ counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3906). The second CZ flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the second CZ state ST7. The CZ counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining CZ continuous games in the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 by the main MPU 72.

After that, the end command of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3907). The end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended and has shifted to the second CZ state ST7. When the production side MPU 92 receives the end command of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the effect corresponding to the second CZ state ST7 is executed after the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is executed. Controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. As a result, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended, and it is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the second CZ state ST7 has been completed. The image display device 63 may be configured to display the remaining number of CZ continuous games in the second CZ state ST7.

Next, the transition mode of the gaming state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72. 72 (a) shows the situation of the first section SC1, FIG. 72 (b) shows the situation of the second section SC2, and FIG. 72 (c) shows the period of the first CZ state ST6. (D) shows the period of the normal game state ST1, FIG. 72 (e) shows the period of the pseudo bonus state ST4, and FIG. 72 (f) shows the period of the second CZ state ST7.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 at the timing of t1 which is the first section SC1. In this case, the first CZ state ST6 is set at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In the first CZ state ST6, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. Therefore, at the timing of t2 when the first CZ state ST6 ends, the normal game state ST1 shifts to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 72 (d). After that, the transition is won in the normal transition lottery process (step S3711) executed in the normal game state ST1, or the number of remaining released games becomes "0", so that FIG. 72 (step S3711) is at the timing of t3. As shown in d) and FIG. 72 (e), the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

After that, at the timing of t4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72 (e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the gaming state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72 (f). The transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S3707) in the CZ executed in the second CZ state ST7. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the gaming state returns from the second CZ state ST7 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 72 (e) and 72 (f).

After that, at the timing of t6, the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 72 (e). In this case, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the gaming state becomes the second CZ state ST7 as shown in FIG. 72 (f). In the second CZ state ST7, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the second CZ state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 72 (f), and the game section changes from the second section SC2 to the first section as shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b). Move to SC1. Actually, the process shifts to the end preparation state ST5 before the end of the second CZ state ST7 and the end of the first section SC1.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 as shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b). In this case, the first CZ state ST6 is set at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 72 (c). The transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S3707) in the CZ executed in the first CZ state ST6. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the gaming state shifts from the first CZ state ST6 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 72 (c) and 72 (e).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, it becomes the second CZ state ST7 in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur than in the normal game state ST1. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 again.

If the second CZ state ST7 ends without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 also ends. As a result, when the second CZ state ST7 ends without the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second section SC2 does not continue in a state where the expectation of the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is low. It becomes possible to.

When newly set in the second section SC2, it becomes the first CZ state ST6 in which the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is more likely to occur than the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the second section SC2 is newly set.

In particular, in the configuration in which the second CZ state ST7 is set after the pseudo bonus state ST4 is completed, the first CZ state ST6 is set when the second section SC2 is newly set, so that after the pseudo bonus state ST4 is completed. It is possible to increase the probability of returning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Further, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, both the second CZ state ST7 and the first CZ state ST6 are sequentially generated, whereas the second section SC2 is newly set after the start of supply of the operating power. In that case, only the first CZ state ST6 will occur. Therefore, even if the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 immediately after the start of supply of the operating power is not set so high, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

If the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the first CZ state ST6, the second section SC2 is set to the normal game state ST1. As a result, even if the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the first CZ state ST6, the second section SC2 can be continued.

By winning any combination in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1, the combination is set in the second section SC2. As a result, the transition from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 can be generated at an early stage. Further, even if the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur in the second CZ state ST7 that occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends, the second section SC2 ends with the end of the second CZ state ST7. By becoming the first section SC1 and winning any combination in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1, the second section SC2 is newly set and the first CZ state ST6 is set. Therefore, not only the probability of re-shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed increases, but also the number of games required for re-shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be reduced.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as the pseudo-bonus state ST4, there are a first pseudo-bonus state in which the number of initial continuous games is relatively large and a second pseudo-bonus state in which the number of initial continuous games is relatively small. Specifically, in the first pseudo-bonus state, the number of initial continuous games is 100 games, and in the second pseudo-bonus state, the number of initial continuous games is 50 games.

In the configuration in which the first pseudo-bonus state and the second pseudo-bonus state exist as described above, in the present embodiment, when the special bell prize is established on the main line ML, the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state is performed. If it is the corresponding transition waiting period, it corresponds to the first pseudo bonus state in the invalid period of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the subsequent game. If the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed and the transition waiting period corresponds to the transition to the second pseudo bonus state, the stop button is displayed after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the subsequent game. During the invalid period of the operations 42 to 44, the combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo bonus state is stopped and displayed. Then, after the combination of these symbols is stopped and displayed, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted, and then the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 become effective, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination.

73 (a) to 73 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above.

When the index value IV = 10 is won in the normal game state ST1 and the transition waiting period, the right reel 32R is first stopped, and the "white 7" symbol and "white 7" are displayed on the main line ML. When the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed so that the symbol "Red 7" symbol is stopped, a special bell prize is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 73 (a). After that, when a new game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started during the invalid period of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Rotation is stopped.

When this time is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), as a combination of symbols corresponding to the first pseudo-bonus state on the main line ML. , The "red 7" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R. As a result, the player is notified that the transition to the first pseudo-bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 is operated or not, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted, and then the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 become effective, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination.

When this time is the transition waiting period corresponding to the transition to the second pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), as a combination of symbols corresponding to the second pseudo-bonus state on the main line ML. , The "BAR" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R. As a result, the player is notified that the transition to the second pseudo-bonus state will occur. After that, regardless of whether the start lever 41 is operated or not, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted, and then the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 become effective, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. Based on this, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination.

According to the above configuration, when the special bell winning is established in the transition waiting period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that occurs after the lapse of the current transition waiting period is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the special bell prize.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of other embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, if any of the winning combinations is won in the winning combination in the first section SC1, the process will surely shift to the second section SC2, but the limitation is limited to this. However, for example, if any combination is won in the combination lottery process in the first section SC1, a section transfer lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to transfer to the second section SC2 by lottery, and the section transfer is performed. When the transition is won in the lottery process, the transition to the second section SC2 may be performed. Further, in the first section SC1, when a predetermined combination defined as a part of the combination in the combination lottery process is won, the configuration may be shifted to the second section SC2, and when the predetermined combination is won. A section shift lottery process for determining whether or not to shift to the second section SC2 by lottery is executed, and when the shift is won in the section shift lottery process, the shift to the second section SC2 may be performed. The predetermined combination may be a combination in which the winning probability changes according to the set value, or may be a combination in which the winning probability does not change according to the set value. Further, in the first section SC1, a section shift lottery process is executed to determine by lottery whether or not to shift to the second section SC2 in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, and the section shift lottery process is performed. If the transition is won in, the configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 is performed.

(2) In the case of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 in the first embodiment or the like, the transition lottery process (step S2112) is executed in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It may be configured as such. In this case, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

(3) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of released games is set as the maximum number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed in the case of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of released games may not be set.

(4) In the first embodiment or the like, if the addition period continues after the production side addition period ends, even if the number of games is added in the game of the continuing addition period. However, the configuration is such that the number of games added is not notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be executed when the number of games added is added. For example, when the production side addition period is the addition period and the game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the addition period Although the progress is stopped, it will be notified that the minimum number of games to be added among the number of games to be added selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2614) has been given, but the additional period on the production side has ended. If a larger number of games to be added than the above minimum number of games is selected in the second additional lottery process (step S2614) executed in a situation where the additional period continues after the game is added, the selected additional games are added. The configuration may be such that it is notified that the number of games having the difference of the minimum number of games with respect to the number of target games has been given. In this case, it is possible to accurately notify the number of additional games actually given to the player.

(5) When a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the addition period in the first embodiment or the like, the addition period While the progress is stopped, the progress of the additional period on the production side is continued, but it is not limited to this, and when the above non-target game is executed during the additional period, the additional period The progress may be stopped and the progress of the additional period on the production side may be stopped. In this case, as a configuration in which the progress of the production side addition period is stopped, the moving image display of the production side addition period executed in the image display device 63 is temporarily stopped at the display content immediately before the start of the non-target game, and then after that. When the target game, which is a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3", is executed, the temporarily stopped state is released and the video display during the additional period on the production side is temporarily stopped. A configuration that can be restarted is conceivable. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the non-target game has been executed during the addition period. Further, as described above, in the state where the moving image display during the additional period on the production side is temporarily stopped, a character image or the like clearly indicating that the non-target game is being executed may be displayed. Further, as described above, in the state where the moving image display during the addition period on the effect side is temporarily stopped, the light emission effect on the upper lamp 61 and the sound output effect on the speaker 62 may be temporarily stopped, and these effects are temporarily stopped. It may be configured to continue as it is without being caused, or it may be configured to execute the corresponding effect when the non-target game is being executed.

(6) When a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) or a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the addition period in the first embodiment or the like, the addition period The configuration is such that the progress is stopped, but the progress is not limited to this, and when the game in the CB state is executed, the progress of the additional period is stopped, while the game in which the number of bets is "2" is When executed, the progress of the additional period may not be stopped, and when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the progress of the additional period is stopped, while the game in the CB state is executed. If this is the case, the progress of the additional period may not be stopped.

(7) In the first embodiment or the like, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the first section SC1, the game does not shift to the second section SC2. , Not limited to this, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs in the game or a predetermined The configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 occurs with a probability. Further, when the configuration is applied to the third embodiment, a pseudo bonus depends on whether the number of bets in the game following the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred is "2" or "3". Instead of the configuration in which the transition to the state ST4 occurs, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs depending on whether the number of bets of the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "2" or "3". It may be configured to be used. Specifically, if the number of bets of the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the game, and the number of bets of the game shifted to the second section SC2 is If it is "2", the game may be configured so that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur. This makes it possible to increase the importance of executing the game in which the number of bets is "3".

(8) In the third embodiment, when the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 surely occurs, and the second section When the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to SC2 is "2", the normal game state ST1 is surely continued, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3", the direct hit lottery process is executed, and if the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit winning, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. It may be a configuration in which the migration of the above occurs. In addition, the direct hit lottery process is executed regardless of whether the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3" or "2", and the direct hit lottery process hits directly. If the player wins, the game shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the number of bets in the next game after the game moved to the second section SC2 is "2". In this case, the probability of winning a direct hit in the direct hit lottery process may be higher than in the case of.

(9) In the second section SC2 that first shifts after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed in the third embodiment, the game that shifts to the second section SC2. If the number of bets in the next game is "3", the game shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if it is "2", the normal game state ST1 is continued. In the second section SC2 that shifts after the end of the two section SC2, the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur regardless of the number of bets in the next game of the game that has shifted to the second section SC2. As a result, the second section SC2 that first occurs after the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed, and the second section SC2 that occurs after the second section SC2. It is possible to change the mode of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

As a specific configuration for realizing the above configuration, for example, when a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105) is executed, "1" is set in the flag after clearing the main RAM 74. On the other hand, when the second section SC2 ends, the flag is cleared to "0" after the clearing. Then, when the transition to the second section SC2 occurs and the flag is set to "1" after clearing, the number of bets in the next game of the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "3". If there is, it shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4, and if it is "2", the normal game state ST1 is continued, and when the shift to the second section SC2 occurs, "1" is set in the flag after clearing. If not, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of the number of bets in the next game of the game that has transitioned to the second section SC2. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects with a relatively simple processing configuration.

(10) In the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag in the first embodiment and the like, and the period in which the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more and the first to third transition confirmation flags. In the situation where "1" is not set in any of the cases and the special bell prize is not established in the transition waiting period which is one of the periods in which the value of the unlocked game counter 74e is 5 or less, the transition waiting is made. When the final game of the period is reached, an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed when the index value IV = 10 is not won in the lottery process of the role in the final game is executed. It may be configured as such. As a result, in the final game of the transition waiting period, it is possible to start the final production at the time of non-winning at an early timing.

(11) When the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2 in the third embodiment is "2", the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 continues. At the same time, when the number of remaining released games becomes "0" in the situation or when the release is won in the release lottery process (step S3218), the second section SC2 ends and the game shifts to the first section SC1. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the number of bets in the game following the game shifted to the second section SC2 is "2", the situation in which the second section SC2 is in the normal gaming state ST1 continues. If the number of remaining released games becomes "0" or if the release is won in the release lottery process (step S3218), the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur. Further, in the situation where the second section SC2 generated by the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 in the configuration, the remaining number of released games is "0". In this case, or when the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process (step S3218), the second section SC2 may be terminated and the process may be shifted to the first section SC1. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming state after the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal gaming state ST1 finished different depending on the content of the trigger for the occurrence of the situation.

(12) In the fourth embodiment, when any CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74 and is set in the second section SC2, the setting is made. The configuration is such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur at times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific flag is set in the main RAM 74 and the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the CB winning is not established in the game in which the CB winning data is stored, the game ends. It is configured to set "1" to a specific flag. Then, when "1" is set in the specific flag and the second section SC2 is set, the game set in the second section SC2 may shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4, while the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur. If "1" is not set in the specific flag and the second section SC2 is set, the game set in the second section SC2 does not shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

With this configuration, the specific flag is set to "1" at the end of the game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, in the game in which the CB winning data is stored, the first control process of the game section is performed. After being executed, the specific flag will be set to "1". Therefore, even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process of the winning combination of the game executed in the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 is set, the first control process of the game section is performed in the game. Since "1" is not yet set in the specific flag at the timing of execution, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur in the game set in the second section SC2. In the fourth embodiment, not only the CB winning data but also the 10th supplementary winning data is set at the index value IV = 17, and the establishment of the 10th supplementary winning prize has priority over the establishment of the CB winning prize. In a game in which the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the CB winning is not established, and "1" is surely set in the specific flag in the game.

In the situation where "1" is set in the specific flag in the above configuration, when the CB winning is established, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, or the entire clearing process (step S105) is executed. In that case, the specific flag may be cleared to "0". As a result, the situation where "1" is set in the specific flag means that the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, so that the second section is in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. By setting SC2, a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur in the game.

In the above configuration, in the situation where "1" is set in the specific flag, for example, the probability of winning the replay combination and the probability of winning the replay are higher than in the situation where "1" is not set in the specific flag. May be. As a result, the above-mentioned excellent effect can be achieved by using the flag for identifying the game state in which the main MPU 72 is in a gaming state in which the bad rate of winning the replay role and the probability that the replay prize is established are high. Is possible.

(13) In the second section SC2 generated in the situation where the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the fourth embodiment, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 does not occur, and the third embodiment is described above. Similar to the form, in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1, the second section is won when the number of remaining released games becomes "0" or the release is won by the release lottery process. The configuration may be such that SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1.

(14) In the fourth embodiment, when the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and is set in the second section SC2, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur at the time of the setting, while the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. If the number of remaining released games is "0" in the second section SC2 and the normal game state is ST1, or if the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the CB winning data is displayed. The configuration is such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs regardless of whether or not it is stored in the main RAM 74, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of remaining released games is "0" in the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1, or if the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the main RAM 74 When the CB winning data is stored in, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs, but when the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 does not occur. May be.

(15) In the fourth embodiment, if the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and is set in the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process is executed and the direct hit lottery process determines that the direct hit is won. The configuration is such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs, but the configuration is not limited to this, and when the CB winning data is set in the second section SC2 in the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. May be configured so that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 surely occurs.

(16) In the fourth embodiment, even if the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 and is set in the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process is executed and the direct hit lottery process hits directly. The configuration may be such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs by winning. In this case, the case where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and set in the second section SC2 is set in the second section SC2 when the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. The probability of winning a direct hit in the direct hit lottery process may be lower than in the case of being hit.

(17) As a configuration in which the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur even if the index value IV = 17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 61) in the case of the first section SC1 in the fourth embodiment. May be good. As a result, in order to make the situation where the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 when the transition to the second section SC2 occurs, the game before the game in which the transition to the second section SC2 occurs occurs. It is necessary that the index value IV = 17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 61) of the winning combination in.

(18) In the fifth embodiment, the ending flag is provided in the main RAM 74 as in the first embodiment, and when the ending flag is set to "1", the pseudo bonus state ST4 is set. Even if it ends, it may be configured to shift to the end preparation state ST5 without shifting to the second CZ state ST7.

(19) If the number of bets in the game following the game set in the second section SC2 in the fifth embodiment is "3", the transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and the number of bets is "2". If it is, the configuration may be such that the transition to the first CZ state ST6 does not occur and the normal game state ST1 is maintained. Further, if the CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and is set in the second section SC2, the transition to the first CZ state ST6 occurs, and the CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. When the second section SC2 is set in the situation, the configuration may be such that the transition to the first CZ state ST6 does not occur and the normal game state ST1 is maintained.

(20) In the fifth embodiment, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 have the same transition probability to the pseudo bonus state ST4, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first CZ state ST6 and the second CZ state ST7 may have substantially the same configuration although the transition probabilities to the pseudo bonus state ST4 are slightly different. Further, the first CZ state ST6 may have a configuration in which the probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is higher than that of the second CZ state ST7, and the second CZ state ST7 shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4 rather than the first CZ state ST6. The configuration may have a high probability.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments, a plurality of types of pseudo bonus states ST4 may be set. For example, a configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of pseudo-bonus states ST4 having different numbers of initial continuous games are set. Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the transition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game state may be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed. Examples of the advantageous gaming state include an AT state, an ART state, and an RT state.

(22) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of first reference games, which is less than the maximum number of games, or the total net increase in the number of limited games of the game medium. Is less than the maximum net increase number, which is more than the first standard acquisition number. By setting "1" in the ending flag of the main RAM 74, the number of games after that is not added. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games may be added even when the ending flag is set to "1". In this case, the probability of additional games and the expected value of the number of additional games are the same or substantially the same regardless of whether the ending flag is set to "1" or not. It may be configured to be. In addition, in the situation where "1" is set in the ending flag, the probability of additional games and the expected value of the number of additional games are lower than in the situation where "1" is not set in the ending flag. May be good.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is configured to end when the number of remaining continuous games becomes "0", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be terminated when the net increase in the number of game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial end reference number is set, and when the addition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining for the end condition of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to be satisfied. The net increase in the number of sheets will be added. Further, for example, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be terminated when the total number of establishments of the first bell winning or the second bell winning in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 reaches the end reference number of times. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial end reference number of times is set, and when the addition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining for the end condition of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to be satisfied. The total number of times that is established is added.

(24) The first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", but the specific values of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are arbitrary. Further, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number smaller than the second predetermined number.

(25) Although the first CB state ST2 is configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced, it may be configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased, and is owned by the player. It is possible to increase the number of game media to be played, but the game state may be such that the number of cards to be increased is very small, such as one or two cards.

Further, in the game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of game media given in the game is larger than the number of bets (specifically, "3") set for starting the game. Although it may be a number, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the granting of the game medium is low, so that the game medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased as a whole in the first CB state ST2, or the game medium owned by the player is used. It may be configured to be reduced.

(26) The second CB state ST3 is configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced, but may be configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased, and is owned by the player. It is possible to increase the number of game media to be played, but the number of games to be increased may be very small, such as one or two, and the number of game media owned by the player can be increased to some extent. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media given in the game is larger than the number of bets (specifically, "2") set for starting the game. Although it may be a number, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the granting of the game medium is low, so that the game medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased as a whole in the second CB state ST3, or the game medium owned by the player is used. It may be configured to be reduced.

(27) If the CB state ST2 and ST3 are reached in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 and ST3 is the remaining continuation of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The configuration is not subtracted from the number of games, but the configuration is not limited to this, and if the CB states ST2 and ST3 are reached in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number of games executed in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is It may be configured to be subtracted from the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of shifting to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4.

(28) In a situation where the set value update process (step S106) is being executed, the notification regarding the winning state of at least one of the first CB combination and the second CB combination may be executed. For example, if the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 notifies that the second CB winning combination has not been won. It may be a configuration to be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to do. Further, for example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in the situation where the first CB combination winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, it indicates that the image display device 63 has won the first CB combination. The notification may be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to do.

(29) In a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, the procedure for setting the second CB combination to the winning state may be displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, if neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the 2nd CB combination is won by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the 2nd CB is won in the winning game. It is notified that the game in which the number of bets is "3" should be executed after that without winning the prize. In addition, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB state ST2 is transferred, and the first CB state ST2 is digested. You will be informed of what to do. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is exhausted, the second CB combination is won by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game. After that, it is notified that the game in which the number of bets is "3" should be executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to win the second CB role.

(30) In a situation where the 2nd CB combination has not been won, if the 2nd CB combination is won and the 2nd CB winning is not established, a notification indicating that the 2nd CB combination has been won is executed. May be. As the notification, for example, a notification sound such as "Complete" may be output from the speaker 62.

(31) When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the corresponding notification may be executed by the image display device 63. For example, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before as the notification. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the situation where the first CB combination is won, the corresponding notification may be executed by the image display device 63. For example, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before as the notification.

(32) If the number of bets becomes "2" in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the operation of the start lever 41 may be invalidated after that. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be, for example, 10 seconds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed even though the second CB combination has already been won. Further, the notification indicating that the second CB combination has already been won in this invalid period may be executed by the speaker 62 or the image display device 63, and the start lever 41 is operated during the invalid period. It may be configured to be executed with the fact as an opportunity.

(33) When the game is started in the first section SC1, it is determined to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and the shift to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game, while the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Further, it may be configured that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the end of the game and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games digested in the first section SC1.

(34) When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may occur, while when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, a pseudo-bonus The configuration is such that the transition to the state ST4 does not occur, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs even when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be the configuration to obtain. In this case, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the same or substantially the same depending on whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed and the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be configured to be. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be configured. In addition, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. It may be configured.

(35) A configuration may be configured in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process based on the setting confirmation operation performed by the game hall administrator. .. For example, in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the main MPU 72, the setting confirmation process is executed and the setting confirmation process is executed by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and operating the ON operation. The setting value currently set in the above may be displayed on the combined display unit 66. In the configuration, when the setting confirmation process is executed, a partial clear process (step S104) may be executed. When the partial clearing process is executed, the first CB winning data is deleted, but the information of the second CB winning data and the set value is not deleted. As a result, it is possible to confirm the currently set value while preventing the second CB winning data from being deleted.

(36) In the partial clearing process (step S104), the information is not limited to the second CB winning data to be excluded from the deletion target, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74 may also be excluded. .. As a result, even if the power is temporarily turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started and a partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on thereafter, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. Become. In this case, it is necessary to execute the all clear process (step S105) in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, and when the all clear process (step S105) is executed, the second CB is won. The data will be erased.

(37) When "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74, the subsequent progress of the game may be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(38) The configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 may occur on the condition that the second CB combination is won, and the pseudo is on the condition that the second CB combination is won. The configuration may be such that a transition to the bonus state ST4 may occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of winning the second CB combination.

Further, in the situation where the first CB combination is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may not occur, and in the situation where the first CB combination is won, even the second section SC2 is in a pseudo-bonus state. The configuration may be such that the transition to ST4 does not occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of making the first CB winning state a winning state.

(39) Even in the second section SC2, a period in which the section display unit 67 is in the off state can occur, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the second section SC2, it is surely made. The section display unit 67 may be lit.

(40) An advantageous display unit is provided separately from the section display unit 67, and the section display unit 67 is always lit in the case of the second section SC2 and always in the section display unit 67 in the case of the first section SC1. Is turned off, and the advantageous display unit is always lit when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is on, and the advantageous display unit is always turned off when the is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

(41) The number of games in which the end preparation state ST5 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four or more games. Further, there are a plurality of types of continuous games in the end preparation state ST5, and the end preparation state ST5 may be maintained over the number of continuous games selected by lottery from the number of continuous games of the plurality of types.

(42) In the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, the update process (step S1908 to step S1912) of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is not executed when the replay winning is established. , The update process may be executed. In this case, if the replay winning is established, the number of bets of the current game is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d in step S1908, and the number of bets of the current game is added to the total number of acquisitions counter 74d in step S1910. Will be done. Therefore, even if the above update process is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is constant.

(43) In the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state (that is, the display state), and when a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state (that is, the display state). That is, it may be configured to be in a hidden state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display the type of the abnormal state. In the configuration in which the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68 in this way, the section display unit 67 is turned off when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. By displaying the status corresponding to the type of abnormal status on the dual-purpose display unit 66, even if the same abnormal status occurs, the common display is performed depending on whether or not it is the second section SC2. Since the event that the display mode of the area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easy to identify the type of abnormal state.

(44) A configuration in which the total number of digested games and the total number of advantageous games digested in the second section SC2 are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the lottery process of the winning combination, the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination and the total number of games to be drawn are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination is calculated. May be. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each game state and the second section SC2, and the number of game media granted per unit game is stored. The game state and the second section SC2 may be calculated individually.

(45) In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, so that the configuration is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than the gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 may be advantageous because the number of game media to be given increases when is satisfied.

(46) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67, and may be performed by using, for example, the credit display unit 65. , The configuration may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results of the notification target, the events of each type of notification target may be sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the combined display unit 66. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

(47) The first section SC1 may also have a configuration in which the maximum number of continuous games is set. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is set in the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 continues until the maximum number of games is reached. Further, by setting the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 to be the same between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value does not occur with respect to the upper limit number of games. It becomes possible.

(48) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of effective lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(49) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the directing MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media given by winning the prize can be notified by the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is provided on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(51) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game. In addition, there may be a configuration in which a bonus state that is advantageous to the player exists.

(52) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Situation setting means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the process of step S3504 in the main MPU 72) set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2). The function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (in the first embodiment, steps S2203, S2206 and step S2203 in the main MPU 72). A function of executing the process of step S2213, a function of executing the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment), and
Situation continuation means for continuing the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous gaming state ends (a function of executing the processes of steps S2711 to S2713 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and main in the fifth embodiment). The function of executing the processes of steps S3905 and S3906 on the side MPU 72) and
With
The advantageous transition means is a gaming machine capable of shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means.

According to the feature A1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous shiftable situation may be continued, and in the continued advantageous shiftable situation, the game state may shift to the advantageous game state. As a result, even if the advantageous gaming state is once terminated, it is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of a further advantageous gaming state.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it includes a predetermined ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for terminating both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to the feature A2, there is a case where both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transitionable situation are terminated as well as the case where the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous gaming state is terminated. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation continues when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature A3. Advantageous end means for ending the advantageous game state based on the fact that the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state (the number of remaining continuous games is "0") (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 A function of executing the process of steps S2710 to S2716, a function of executing the process of step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment), and
The processing of the situation ending means (step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transitionable situation based on the fact that the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous transitionable situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied). Function to execute) and
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state, a means for ending the advantageous game state even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A1 or A2.

According to the feature A3, when the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state also ends with the end of the advantageous transition possible situation even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, in the case of this configuration, not only the case where the advantageous transition possible state is continued when the advantageous gaming state ends, but also the case where both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation end may occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature A4. The situation ending means is characterized in that when the number of games executed in the advantageous transitionable situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is determined that the situation end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transitionable situation is terminated. Features The gaming machine according to A3.

According to the feature A4, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A5. The situation termination means is for executing the game when the advantageous shiftable situation continues from the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous shiftable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of digested game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit difference. The gaming machine according to feature A3 or A4, wherein when the number is reached, it is determined that the situation end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated.

According to the feature A5, the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature A6. The situation end condition is a condition that is satisfied by repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation.
By repeating the game in the advantageous shiftable situation, the predetermined pre-end condition is satisfied before the end condition of the situation is satisfied.
In the advantageous transition means, the predetermined pre-end condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means (the value of the continuous game number counter 74c becomes equal to or more than the second reference game number, or. A means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S2206 in the main MPU 72) based on the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d being equal to or greater than the second reference acquisition number) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, characterized in that the game is present.

According to the feature A6, when the advantageous shiftable situation is continued after the advantageous game state ends, the predetermined end before the advantageous shiftable situation end condition is satisfied and the advantageous shiftable situation ends. When the previous condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even after the advantageous game state ends, even though the advantageous shiftable situation continues, the advantageous shiftable situation does not end without further transition to the advantageous game state. It becomes possible.

Feature A7. The situation end condition is a condition that is satisfied by repeating the game in the advantageous transition possible situation.
By repeating the game in the advantageous shiftable situation, the specific pre-end condition is satisfied before the end condition is satisfied (the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c and the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is first. The number of games must be equal to or greater than the standard number of games, or the sum of the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d and the value obtained by integrating the expected acquisition value with the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter must be equal to or greater than the first standard acquisition number). ,
The situation ending means is characterized in that when the advantageous gaming state ends in a situation where the specific pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated even if the situation end condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A3 to A6.

According to the feature A7, when the advantageous gaming state is terminated in the situation where the specific pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated even if the situation end condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shiftable situation from continuing when the advantageous game state ends in the situation where the situation end condition at which the advantageous shiftable situation ends is near. Therefore, even though the transition to the advantageous gaming state has occurred, the event that the situation end condition is immediately satisfied and the advantageous gaming state also ends with the termination of the advantageous transition possible situation does not occur. It becomes possible to.

Feature A8. An additional means (step in the main MPU 72) for executing an additional process for increasing the number of games executed by the end of the advantageous game state based on the occurrence of the additional opportunity in the advantageous game state. A function for executing the processes of steps S2603 to S2616 and steps S2703 to S2708) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the addition means does not execute the addition process even if the addition trigger occurs when the specific pre-end condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state. ..

According to the feature A8, when a specific pre-end condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state, the addition process is not executed even if the addition trigger occurs, so that the addition process is executed even though the addition process is executed. , It is possible to prevent the event that the advantageous gaming state ends as the situation end condition is satisfied and the advantageous transition possible situation ends.

Feature A9. It is provided with an end condition notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2512, S2513, and S2817 in the effect side MPU 92) for notifying the advantageous end condition in the advantageous gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the end condition notification means prevents the advantageous end condition from being notified in the advantageous gaming state when the specific pre-end condition is satisfied.

According to the feature A9, when a specific pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous end condition is not notified in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the advantageous gaming state ends as the situation ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous transition possible situation ends even though the advantageous ending condition is not satisfied. It becomes possible to make it.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (the process of step S3206 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment is executed. Function to do) and
A situation continuation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S331 to S3312 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for continuing the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous gaming state ends.
Transition limiting means for limiting the transition of the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation continued by the situation continuation means (function of executing the processes of steps S3213 to S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment). When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. In this case, when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous shiftable situation may be continued, and in this continuous advantageous shiftable situation, the transition to the advantageous game state is restricted. As a result, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is forcibly restricted after the advantageous gaming state is once terminated, while the transition condition to the advantageous gaming state is fixed when the advantageous transition possible situation is newly started. It becomes possible to generate.

Feature B2. Based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state (the number of remaining cancellation games is "0" or the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process). The means for terminating the advantageous shiftable situation (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S3215 and step S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the feature B2, the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous shiftable situation is not the advantageous game state. Then, when the advantageous shiftable situation ends, the transition to the advantageous game state may occur as the advantageous shiftable situation is newly started. Therefore, the player expects that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state.

Feature B3. Means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation (in step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) based on the digestion of the games of the number of released games determined when the advantageous gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, which comprises a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processes of steps S3215 and S3216).

According to the feature B3, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the digestion of the games of the number of released games determined when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous shiftable situation is advantageous. In a situation where the game is not in a game state, the player expects that the number of unlocked games is completed at an early stage.

Feature B4. Means for executing the release lottery process in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous gaming state (the function of executing the process in step S3218 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).
Means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the cancellation winning in the cancellation lottery process (Affirmative determination is made in step S3219 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment, and steps S3215 and S3216 (Function to execute the processing of) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process executed in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state. However, in a situation where the game is not in an advantageous gaming state, the player expects that the cancellation lottery process will be executed and that the cancellation lottery process will result in a cancellation win.

Feature B5. Advantageous end means for ending the advantageous game state based on the fact that the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state (the number of remaining continuous games is "0") (in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3310) and
The processing of the situation ending means (step S1914 in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transitionable situation based on the fact that the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous transitionable situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied). Function to execute) and
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state, a means for ending the advantageous game state even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4.

According to the feature B5, when the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state also ends with the end of the advantageous transition possible situation even if the advantageous end condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous gaming state from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, in the case of this configuration, not only the case where the advantageous transition possible state is continued when the advantageous gaming state ends, but also the case where both the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation end may occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation is continued when the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature B6. The situation ending means is characterized in that when the number of games executed in the advantageous transitionable situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is determined that the situation end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transitionable situation is terminated. Features The gaming machine according to B5.

According to the feature B6, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B7. The situation termination means is for executing the game when the advantageous shiftable situation continues from the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous shiftable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of digested game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit difference. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein when the number is reached, it is determined that the situation end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated.

According to the feature B7, the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the advantageous transition means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the advantageous transition possible situation.

According to the feature B8, since the transition to the advantageous game state occurs based on the start of the advantageous shiftable situation, the advantageous shiftable situation is in the advantageous shiftable situation but not the advantageous game state. The player expects to finish early.

Feature B9. The configuration is such that the game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set as a bet.
In the advantageous transition means, the first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of the game media is used in the branching target game, which is either the game in which the advantageous transition possible situation is started or the game that occurs thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming state can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state based on the bet setting.

According to the feature B9, the game state is changed to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the game to be branched that occurs when the advantageous shiftable situation is started or after the start. Therefore, when the advantageous transition possible situation is newly started, it is basically possible to shift to the advantageous game state.

Feature B10. When a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media out of the predetermined number is set as a bet in the game to be branched, it is a non-advantageous situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to feature B9, which comprises setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).

According to the feature B10, the manager of the game hall who thinks that it is not preferable that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs immediately at the start of business of the game hall generates the advantageous transition situation in advance and the game to be branched. By setting the bet on the second predetermined number of game media, it is possible to intentionally set the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous game state.

Feature B11. The transition limiting means is described in feature B10, which limits the transition of the advantageous gaming state in a situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state set by the non-advantageous setting means. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature B11, in the game to be branched when the advantageous shiftable situation is newly started, the bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media, so that the advantageous shiftable situation is not the advantageous game state. In the event of a situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur for a while after the opening of the game hall.

Feature B12. The situation setting means is characterized in that the advantageous shiftable situation is set based on the execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B9 to B11.

According to the feature B12, the advantageous transferable situation is set based on the execution of the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. However, it is considered that the player plays the game with the first predetermined number of game media set as bets. As a result, it is basically possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state when a new advantageous transition possible situation occurs.

Feature B13. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
With
The features B1 to B12 are characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature B13, since it is set to the advantageous transferable situation based on winning one of the roles in the combination lottery process in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible, it is advantageous from the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. It is possible to generate a transition to a transitionable situation at an early stage.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B13, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. In a gaming machine that enables the start of a game when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of gaming media is set as a bet.
A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
The first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in the game to be branched, which is one of the game in which the advantageous shiftable situation is started and the game that occurs thereafter. Based on the above, the processing of step S3206 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment is executed for the advantageous transition means (third embodiment) that enables the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) that is advantageous to the player. Function) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the game state is changed to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the game to be branched that occurs when the advantageous shiftable situation is started or after the start. Is possible to shift, so that it is basically possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition possible situation is newly started. Therefore, the player expects that the advantageous transition possible situation is newly started, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. When a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media out of the predetermined number is set as a bet in the game to be branched, it is a non-advantageous situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it includes setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).

According to the feature C2, the manager of the game hall who thinks that it is not preferable that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs immediately at the start of business of the game hall generates the advantageous transition situation in advance and the game to be branched. By setting the bet on the second predetermined number of game media, it is possible to intentionally set the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous game state.

Feature C3. Transition limiting means (step S3213 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) for limiting the transition of the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous transition possible situation set by the non-advantageous setting means and not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S3216).

According to the feature C3, in the game to be branched when the advantageous shiftable situation is newly started, the bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media, so that the advantageous shiftable situation is not the advantageous game state. In the event of a situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state is restricted in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it is possible to intentionally create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur for a while after the opening of the game hall.

Feature C4. Based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state (the number of remaining cancellation games is "0" or the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process). The means for terminating the advantageous shiftable situation (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S3215 and step S3216 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature C3.

According to the feature C4, the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the fact that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous shiftable situation is not the advantageous game state. Then, when the advantageous shiftable situation ends, the transition to the advantageous game state may occur as the advantageous shiftable situation is newly started. Therefore, the player expects that the cancellation condition is satisfied in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state.

Feature C5. Means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation (in step S3214 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment) based on the digestion of the games of the number of released games determined when the advantageous gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, which comprises a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processes of steps S3215 and S3216).

According to the feature C5, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the digestion of the games of the number of released games determined when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous shiftable situation is advantageous. In a situation where the game is not in a game state, the player expects that the number of unlocked games is completed at an early stage.

Feature C6. Means for executing the release lottery process in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous gaming state (the function of executing the process in step S3218 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment).
Means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the cancellation winning in the cancellation lottery process (Affirmative determination is made in step S3219 in the main MPU 72 of the third embodiment, and steps S3215 and S3216 (Function to execute the processing of) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that

According to the feature C6, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the cancellation is won in the cancellation lottery process executed in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous game state. However, in a situation where the game is not in an advantageous gaming state, the player expects that the cancellation lottery process will be executed and that the cancellation lottery process will result in a cancellation win.

Feature C7. The situation setting means can be set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on the execution of a game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6.

According to the feature C7, the advantageous transferable situation can be set based on the execution of the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. However, it is considered that the player plays the game with the first predetermined number of game media set as bets. As a result, it is basically possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state when a new advantageous transition possible situation occurs.

Feature C8. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
With
The features C1 to C7 are characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C8, it is set to the advantageous transferable situation based on winning one of the roles in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible, so that it is advantageous from the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. It is possible to generate a transition to a transitionable situation at an early stage.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the processing of the advantageous transition means (step S2203, step S2206 and step S2213 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player is executed. Function to do) and
With
Depending on whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is a predetermined situation (a situation in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the said in the advantageous shiftable situation. A gaming machine characterized in that the presence or absence of transition to an advantageous gaming state or the transition mode is different.

According to the feature D1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible situation. In this case, depending on whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is a predetermined situation, the presence or absence of the transition to the advantageous game state or the transition mode in the advantageous shiftable situation is different. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of the advantageous transition possible situation but also to whether or not it is the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. A predetermined information storage means (main side RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature D2, the transition to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous shiftable situation is made depending on whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. The presence or absence of or the transition mode is different. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of the advantageous transition possible situation but also to whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature D3. Information erasing means (a function of executing a partial clear process and a total clear process in the main MPU 72) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means based on the start of supply of operating power. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is not erased when the advantageous shiftable situation ends.

According to the feature D3, immediately after the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined information may not be stored in the predetermined information storage means, but even if the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the predetermined information is stored as an opportunity. It will not be erased. As a result, whether or not there is a shift to the advantageous gaming state between the advantageous shiftable situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and the advantageous shiftable situation that occurs again after the advantageous shiftable situation has already occurred. It is possible to make the transition mode different.

Feature D4. It is provided with a means for executing a setting value determination process (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for determining a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage.
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the information erasing means erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means when the set value determination process is executed.

According to the feature D4, when the process of determining the set value to be used is executed, the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, so that an advantageous transition possible situation occurs immediately after this. In the case, the presence / absence or the transition mode of the transition to the advantageous gaming state corresponds to the situation in which the predetermined information is not stored.

Feature D5. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3408 in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
When a predetermined combination (index value IV = 17) is won in the combination lottery process, a means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S3409 in the main MPU 72) and
With
Even if the predetermined prize corresponding to the predetermined combination is not established in the game in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is maintained. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the feature D5, since the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, after the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process. Depending on whether or not it is a situation, it is possible to make a difference in the presence or absence or the mode of transition to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition possible situation is set.

Feature D6. The situation setting means sets the advantageous shiftable situation based on at least winning the predetermined combination in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous transitionable situation.
In the game set to the advantageous shiftable situation, the storage determination process of whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means (the process of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) is more than the lottery process of the winning combination. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is executed after the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature D6, even if the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the game set in the advantageous transition possible situation, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined combination. Prior to this, it is determined whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. As a result, in order to determine that the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game before the game set in the advantageous shiftable situation In the lottery process of the winning combination in, it is necessary to win the predetermined winning combination.

Feature D7. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined combination has been won in the lottery process of the combination.
A feature D5 or D6 characterized in that when the predetermined prize is established in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is deleted. The game machine described in.

According to the feature D7, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by using the information indicating that the predetermined winning combination has been won in the winning combination lottery process.

Feature D8. When the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the specific combination (10th supplementary combination) is also elected.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D5 to D7, wherein the establishment of a specific prize (10th supplementary prize) corresponding to the specific combination has priority over the establishment of the predetermined prize.

According to the feature D8, even if the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, the establishment of the specific prize corresponding to the specific combination to be won at the same time is prioritized, so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. It is possible to maintain the game even after the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process.

Feature D9. The advantageous transition means is a transition execution means (main of the fourth embodiment) capable of shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the setting of the advantageous transition possible situation in the predetermined situation. It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S3506 to S3508 on the side MPU 72).
Any of the features D1 to D8, which is characterized in that when the advantageous shiftable situation is set in a situation other than the predetermined situation, the game state is a game state in which the advantageous shiftable state is not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature D9, it shifts to the advantageous gaming state based on the setting of the advantageous shiftable situation in the predetermined situation, and when it is set to the advantageous shiftable situation in the situation other than the predetermined situation, it is in the advantageous shiftable situation. Therefore, since the situation is not the advantageous gaming state but the gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to set the advantageous transition possible situation in the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature D10. The migration execution means is
Means for executing the advantageous shift lottery process based on the setting of the advantageous shiftable situation in the predetermined situation (function of executing the process of step S3506 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment).
Means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S3508 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) based on the transition winning in the advantageous transition lottery process.
The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature D10, even if the advantageous transition possible situation is set in the predetermined situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the transition is won in the advantageous transition lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set to the advantageous transition possible situation in the predetermined situation, and is expected to win the transition in the advantageous transition lottery process when the advantageous transition possible situation is set in the predetermined situation. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player pays attention to.

Feature D11. In the situation where the advantageous transition means is in the advantageous transition possible state and not in the advantageous gaming state, the predetermined transition trigger (the transition is won in the transition lottery process in step S2112, or the number of remaining released games is reduced. Based on the occurrence of "0"), the means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (the process of step S2213 in the main MPU 72) is executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined situation is met. The gaming machine according to feature D9 or D10, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature D11, when the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and the gaming state is not the advantageous gaming state continues, the predetermined transition opportunity occurs regardless of whether the situation is the predetermined situation or not. A transition to an advantageous gaming state occurs. As a result, the conditions necessary for shifting to the advantageous gaming state depending on whether the advantageous transitionable situation is newly set or the situation in which the advantageous transitionable situation is in the gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state continues. Can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the advantageous gaming state in relation to the advantageous transition possible situation.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the processing of the advantageous transition means (step S2203, step S2206 and step S2213 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player is executed. Function to do) and
With
The advantageous transition means
A first transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2203 and S3508 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the setting of the advantageous shiftable situation, and
With the second transition means (function of executing the process of step S2213 in the main MPU 72) to shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and the gaming state is not the advantageous gaming state. ,
With
The feature is that the conditions for performing the transition to the advantageous gaming state by the first transition means and the conditions for performing the transition to the advantageous gaming state by the second transition means are different. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature E1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state can occur based on the setting of the advantageous transition possible state, and it is also advantageous in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state. A transition to the gaming state can occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous transition possible situation. In this case, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous gaming state depending on whether the advantageous transitionable situation is newly set or the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and the gaming state is not the advantageous gaming state continues. The conditions are different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the advantageous gaming state in relation to the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature E2. The first transition means is set to the advantageous transition possible state in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), and the game is brought into the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to shift the state, and when the advantageous shiftable situation is set in a situation other than the predetermined situation, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous gaming state.
In the situation where the second transition means is in the advantageous transition possible state and not in the advantageous gaming state, the second transition means is a predetermined transition trigger (the transition is won in the transition lottery process in step S2112, or the number of remaining games to be released. The feature E1 is characterized in that the gaming state can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state regardless of whether or not it is the predetermined situation based on the occurrence of "0"). Described gaming machine.

According to the feature E2, when the advantageous shiftable situation is newly set, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is a predetermined situation, and in the advantageous shiftable situation and the advantageous game state. If the situation in which there is no gaming state continues, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a predetermined transition opportunity occurs.

Feature E3. The first transition means is
Means for executing the advantageous shift lottery process based on the setting of the advantageous shiftable situation in the predetermined situation (function of executing the process of step S3506 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment).
Means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S3508 in the main MPU 72 of the fourth embodiment) based on the transition winning in the advantageous transition lottery process.
The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature E3, even if the advantageous transition possible situation is set in the predetermined situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the transition is won in the advantageous transition lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set to the advantageous transition possible situation in the predetermined situation, and is expected to win the transition in the advantageous transition lottery process when the advantageous transition possible situation is set in the predetermined situation. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player pays attention to.

Feature E4. A predetermined information storage means (main side RAM 74) capable of storing predetermined information (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature E4, the transition to the advantageous gaming state in the advantageous shiftable situation is made depending on whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. The presence or absence of or the transition mode is different. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of the advantageous transition possible situation but also to whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

Feature E5. Information erasing means (a function of executing a partial clear process and a total clear process in the main MPU 72) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means based on the start of supply of operating power. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is not erased when the advantageous shiftable situation ends.

According to the feature E5, immediately after the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined information may not be stored in the predetermined information storage means, but even if the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the predetermined information is stored as an opportunity. It will not be erased. As a result, whether or not there is a shift to the advantageous gaming state between the advantageous shiftable situation that occurs immediately after the supply of operating power is started and the advantageous shiftable situation that occurs again after the advantageous shiftable situation has already occurred. It is possible to make the transition mode different.

Feature E6. It is provided with a means for executing a setting value determination process (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for determining a setting value to be used from a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage.
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the information erasing means erases the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means when the set value determination process is executed.

According to the feature E6, when the process of determining the set value to be used is executed, the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, so that an advantageous transition possible situation occurs immediately after this. In the case, the presence / absence or the transition mode of the transition to the advantageous gaming state corresponds to the situation in which the predetermined information is not stored.

Feature E7. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing the processes of steps S3401 to S3408 in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
When a predetermined combination (index value IV = 17) is won in the combination lottery process, a means for storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S3409 in the main MPU 72) and
With
Even if the predetermined prize corresponding to the predetermined combination is not established in the game in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the state in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means is maintained. The game machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the feature E7, since the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, after the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process. Depending on whether or not it is a situation, it is possible to make a difference in the presence or absence or the mode of transition to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition possible situation is set.

Feature E8. The situation setting means sets the advantageous shiftable situation based on at least winning the predetermined combination in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous transitionable situation.
In the game set to the advantageous shiftable situation, the storage determination process of whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means (the process of step S3505 in the main MPU 72) is more than the lottery process of the winning combination. The gaming machine according to feature E7, which is executed after the process of storing the predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means.

According to the feature E8, even if the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the game set in the advantageous transition possible situation, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means for the winning of the predetermined combination. Prior to this, it is determined whether or not the situation set in the advantageous shiftable situation is the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. As a result, in order for the situation set in the advantageous transferable situation to be the situation in which the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the lottery of the role in the game before the game set in the advantageous transferable situation is performed. It is necessary to win a predetermined role in the process.

Feature E9. The predetermined information is information indicating that the predetermined combination has been won in the lottery process of the combination.
A feature E7 or E8 characterized in that when the predetermined prize is established in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means is deleted. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature E9, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect by using the information indicating that the predetermined winning combination has been won in the winning combination lottery process.

Feature E10. When the predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the specific combination (10th supplementary combination) is also elected.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E7 to E9, wherein the establishment of a specific prize (10th supplementary prize) corresponding to the specific combination has priority over the establishment of the predetermined prize.

According to the feature E10, even if the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, the establishment of the specific prize corresponding to the specific combination to be won at the same time is prioritized, so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. It is possible to maintain the game even after the game in which the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment is executed. Function to do) and
When the advantageous gaming state ends, the end-time expectation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting the end-time expectation state (second CZ state ST7), and
With
The expected state at the end is a game characterized in that it is easier to shift to the advantageous gaming state than the predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state ST1), which is the state in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the expected state at the end. Machine.

According to the feature F1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the profit transferable situation, the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is expected to be in the advantageous game state. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends, it is set to the expected end state at which it is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state. As a result, even if the advantageous gaming state ends, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the advantageous gaming state again.

Feature F2. When the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the end, the means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state (processes in steps S3817 and S3818 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment are executed. The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature F2, when the expected state at the end ends without the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs, the advantageous transition possible situation ends. As a result, when the expected state at the end ends without the transition to the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue with the expectation of the transition to the advantageous gaming state being low. It becomes possible.

Feature F3. Based on the setting in the advantageous shiftable situation, the start expectation setting means (fifth) is set to the start expectation state (first CZ state ST6) in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easier than the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the embodiment).

According to the feature F3, when the advantageous shiftable situation is newly set, it is set to the expected start state at which it is easy to shift to the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the advantageous shiftable situation will be newly set.

In particular, when the configuration of feature F2 is provided, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the end, the expected state at the start is newly set to the advantageous transition possible state after that. Will be. This makes it possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends. Further, in the case of this configuration, when the advantageous gaming state ends, both the expected state at the end and the expected state at the start are sequentially generated, whereas the advantageous transition is possible after the start of the supply of operating power. If set to, only the expected state at the start will occur. Therefore, even if the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state immediately after the start of supply of the operating power is not set so high, it is possible to increase the probability of returning to the advantageous gaming state after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein when the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the predetermined gaming state is reached.

According to the feature F4, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the predetermined gaming state is reached. Therefore, the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state is continued. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature F5. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
With
Features F1 to F4 characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature F5, it is set to the advantageous transferable situation based on winning one of the roles in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible, so it is advantageous from the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. It is possible to generate a transition to a transitionable situation at an early stage.

Feature F6. A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (the process of step S3803 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment is executed. Function to do) and
Based on the setting in the advantageous shiftable situation, the process of step S3606 in the main MPU 72 of the fifth embodiment is executed for the start-time expectation setting means (first CZ state ST6) to be set to the start-time expectation state (first CZ state ST6). Function) and
With
The expected start state is a game characterized in that it is easier to shift to the advantageous gaming state than a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state ST1), which is a state in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the expected state at the start. Machine.

According to the feature F6, when the advantageous shiftable situation is newly set, it is set to the expected start state at the time when it is easy to shift to the advantageous game state. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the advantageous shiftable situation will be newly set.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein when the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the predetermined gaming state is reached.

According to the feature F7, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur in the expected state at the start, the predetermined gaming state is reached. Therefore, the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible and not the advantageous gaming state is continued. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature F8. A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process in each game (a function for executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) and
Correspondence control execution means for executing winning correspondence control based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established in the winning combination lottery process (function of executing the processing of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72). When,
With
The feature F6 or F7 is characterized in that the situation setting means is set to the advantageous shiftable situation based on winning any of the winning combinations in the lottery process of the winning combination in a situation other than the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature F8, since it is set to the advantageous transferable situation based on winning one of the roles in the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible, it is advantageous from the situation where the advantageous transferable situation is not possible. It is possible to generate a transition to a transitionable situation at an early stage.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72), which sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S310 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A special combination (index value IV = 10) is set as a winning combination in the combination drawing process.
The pattern display control means has a first stop result (first bell winning) based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the first stop mode (first stop of the left reel 32L) when the special combination is won. (Combination of symbols corresponding to) can be displayed, and based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode (first stop of the right reel 32R) when the special combination is won. It is possible to display the second stop result (combination of symbols corresponding to the special bell winning),
When the special combination is won in the predetermined waiting period (transition waiting period) in which the predetermined profit (pseudo-bonus state ST4) is given after the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, the game machine has the second stop mode. Special notification control means (in the main MPU 72) for executing special notification (notification that the right reel 32R should be stopped first) that makes the player recognizable that the stop operation means should be operated. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S2307 and step S2308, and a function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature G1, when the special combination is won in the predetermined waiting period in which the predetermined profit is given after the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop mode. A special notification is executed that makes the player recognizable. Then, when the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode, the second stop result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the provision of the predetermined profit is approaching by using the stop result of the pattern display means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. Even if the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined waiting period is continued without the predetermined profit being given until the predetermined number of games is consumed in the predetermined waiting period. The gaming machine according to the feature G1.

According to the feature G2, even if the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined waiting period is continued without giving the predetermined profit until the predetermined number of games is consumed in the predetermined waiting period. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined profit is about to be granted by using the stop result of the pattern display means without affecting the timing of granting the predetermined profit.

Feature G3. The special notification control means is characterized in that when the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined standby period, the special notification is not executed even if the special combination is re-winned in the predetermined standby period. Features The gaming machine according to G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, when the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, it is recognized that the provision of the predetermined profit is already approaching because the special notification is not executed even if the special role is won again. It is possible to prevent the special notification from being excessively executed for the player who is playing.

Feature G4. When the special notification control means wins the special combination during the predetermined standby period and the second stop result is not displayed for the execution of the special notification, the special notification control means performs the special combination during the predetermined standby period. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the special notification is executed again when the player is elected again.

According to the feature G4, when the second stop result is not displayed for the special notification being executed in the predetermined waiting period, the special notification is re-elected when the special combination is re-winned in the predetermined waiting period. Will be executed. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the second stop result will be displayed during the predetermined waiting period.

Feature G5. When the predetermined waiting period elapses without winning the special combination, a means for executing a predetermined notification indicating that the predetermined profit is given (execution of the process of step S2510 in the effect side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature G5, if the special combination is not won in the predetermined waiting period, a predetermined notification indicating that the predetermined profit is given is executed. Therefore, it is assumed that the special combination is not won in the predetermined waiting period. It is possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined profit is given.

Feature G6. When the special combination is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, a predetermined notification (the left reel 32L is first stopped) is made so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. It is characterized by having means (a function of executing the processing of step S2309 and step S2310 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the effecting side MPU 92) so that the notification of what should be executed) is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5.

According to the feature G6, when the special combination is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. If a special role is won in a situation other than the predetermined waiting period, the first stop result will be displayed. Therefore, the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display of the second stop result.

Feature G7. The predetermined profits include a first predetermined profit (first pseudo-bonus state) in which the profitability of the player is relatively high and a second predetermined profit (second pseudo-bonus state) in which the profitability of the player is relatively low. , Is set,
When the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined wait period in a situation where the first predetermined profit is given after the end of the predetermined wait period, the pattern display control means is subsequently subjected to the predetermined stop result (“red”. In a situation where the symbol display means is controlled so that the "7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol combination) are displayed, and the second predetermined profit is given after the end of the predetermined waiting period. When the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, the symbol display means is displayed so that the specific stop result (combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "BAR" symbol) is displayed thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that

According to the feature G7, when the first predetermined profit is given after the end of the predetermined waiting period and the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, the predetermined stop result is displayed after that. In a situation where the pattern display means is controlled and the second predetermined profit is given after the end of the predetermined waiting period, if the second stop result is displayed in the predetermined waiting period, the specific stop result is displayed after that. The pattern display means is controlled. As a result, even if a role corresponding to each of the first predetermined profit and the second predetermined profit is not prepared, the player can determine whether the first predetermined profit or the second predetermined profit is given by using the suspension result. Can be recognized by.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) advantageous to the player (function of executing the processes of steps S2203, S2206 and S2213 in the main MPU 72), and
In the advantageous gaming state, the additional means for executing the additional processing for increasing the number of games executed by the end of the advantageous gaming state (steps S2603 to S2616 and steps S2703 to steps S2703 to step S2703 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute the processing of S2708) and
With
The addition means can execute the addition process in the target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3", which is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3), and the non-target game (first CB). A gaming machine characterized in that the addition process is not executed in a state ST2, a second CB state ST3, and a game in which the number of bets is “2”).

According to the feature H1, the addition processing is executed in the advantageous gaming state, so that the number of games executed by the end of the advantageous gaming state is increased. Therefore, the player expects that the addition process is executed in the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the addition process can be executed in the target game, whereas the addition process is not executed in the non-target game. This makes it possible to impose certain restrictions on the situations in which the additional processing can be executed.

Feature H2. The configuration is such that the game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set as a bet.
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set as a bet.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of gaming media is set as a bet.

According to the feature H2, the addition process can be executed in the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, whereas in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is set as bets, the addition process can be executed. The addition process is not executed. As a result, it is basically possible to play a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature H3. The feature H2 is characterized in that a game in which a first predetermined number of game media is bet-set is more advantageous to a player than a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is bet-set. Described game machine.

According to the feature H3, in a configuration in which a game in which a first predetermined number of game media are bet is set is more advantageous to a player than a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is bet is set, the first In a game in which a predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the addition process can be executed, whereas in a game in which a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the addition process is not executed. As a result, by executing the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set in order to make the situation advantageous, the addition process can be naturally executed.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to increase the number of game media required so that the addition process can be executed.

Feature H5. The addition means can execute the addition process in the target game during the addition period (addition period) of the advantageous gaming state.
Based on the execution of the target game in the additional period, the gaming machine executes an update process for approaching the establishment of the end condition of the additional period (process of step S2708 in the main MPU 72). Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the renewal means does not execute the renewal process even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period.

According to the feature H5, not only is the addition process not executed even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period, but also the addition period itself does not proceed when the non-target game is executed during the addition period. As a result, even if the non-target game is accidentally executed during the addition period, the addition period will proceed even though the addition process is not executed. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature H6. It is provided with a period-corresponding effect control means (a function of executing the effect side additional period processing in the effect side MPU 92) so that the period-compatible effect is executed in the additional period.
The feature H5 is characterized in that the period-corresponding effect control means advances the period-corresponding effect regardless of whether the target game is executed or the non-target game is executed during the additional period. The game machine described in.

According to the feature H6, since the period-corresponding effect is executed during the addition period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition period. In this case, when the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the progress of the addition period is stopped, while the progress of the period-corresponding effect is continued. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H7. When the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, whereas the period-corresponding effect is advanced, so that the addition period ends as compared with the game in which the addition period ends. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the period-corresponding effect is completed in the previous game.

According to the feature H7, when the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the addition period ends because the period-corresponding effect is advanced while the update process is not executed in the non-target game. The period-compatible production ends in the game before the game. As a result, even if the non-target game is executed during the additional period, it is possible to execute the period-corresponding effect corresponding to the predetermined number of games.

Feature H8. If the addition process is executed when the addition period continues even after the period-corresponding effect is completed, the profit targeted by the addition process is not notified to the player. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature H7.

According to the feature H8, if the addition process is executed even after the period-corresponding effect is completed and the addition period is continued, the profit to be granted in the addition process is the game. Not notified to the person. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes that the additional period has ended because the period-corresponding effect has already ended, from giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature H9. The addition means reliably executes the addition process when the target game is executed during the addition period.
When the non-target game is executed in the situation where the period-corresponding effect is being executed, the period-corresponding effect control means is provided with the lowest profit among the profits to be granted in the addition process. The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the notification indicating the above is executed.

According to the feature H9, since the addition process is executed every time the target game is executed during the addition period, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition period. In this case, if the non-target game is executed in the situation where the period-corresponding effect is executed, the minimum of the profits to be granted in the addition process is the lowest even though the addition process is not actually executed. The notification that the profit has been granted is executed. As a result, while giving the player the impression that the addition process is executed in each game during the addition period, the notification that the profit is given more than the profit actually given during the addition period is executed. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature H10. It is provided with a situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for setting an advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2).
The advantageous transition means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition is possible.
The gaming machine has a situation ending means (in the main MPU 72) that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous transition possible situation (the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied). The function of executing the process of step S1914) is provided.
When the situation end condition is satisfied in the advantageous shiftable situation and the advantageous game state, not only the advantageous shiftable situation but also the advantageous game state is terminated.
Any of the features H1 to H9, which is characterized in that a process for approaching the establishment of the situation end condition is executed regardless of whether the target game or the non-target game is executed in the advantageous shiftable situation. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature H10, when the non-target game is executed, the addition process is not executed, whereas the process for approaching the establishment of the situation end condition is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of disadvantage of executing the non-target game.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H10, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature group of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group. It is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 72 ... Main side MPU, 74 ... Main side RAM, 74c ... Continuous game number counter, 74d ... Total acquisition number counter, 92 ... Directing side MPU, SC2 ... 2nd section, ST1 ... Normal game state, ST4 ... Pseudo bonus state, ST6 ... 1st CZ state, ST7 ... 2nd CZ state.

Claims (1)

An advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
An additional means for executing an additional process for increasing the number of games executed by the end of the advantageous game state in the advantageous game state.
With
The addition means can execute the addition process in the target game during the addition period in the advantageous gaming state, and does not execute the addition process in the non-target game even during the addition period . ,
This gaming machine is
Based on the execution of the target game in the addition period, the update means for executing the update process for approaching the establishment of the end condition of the addition period, and the update means.
A period-corresponding effect control means for executing the period-corresponding effect during the additional period, and
With
The update means does not execute the update process even if the non-target game is executed during the addition period.
The period-corresponding effect control means advances the period-corresponding effect regardless of whether the target game is executed or the non-target game is executed during the additional period.
When the non-target game is executed during the addition period, the update process is not executed in the non-target game, whereas the period-corresponding effect is advanced, so that the addition period ends as compared with the game in which the addition period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the production corresponding to the period is completed in the previous game.

Images